Bmw 2006 650I Convertible Owners Manual

Bmw-2006-650I-Coupe-Owners-Manual-694378 bmw-2006-650i-coupe-owners-manual-694378

2006 650i Convertible Owner's Manual 2006 650i Convertible Owner's Manual

2006 650i Coupe Owner's Manual 2006 650i Coupe Owner's Manual

2015-04-13

: Bmw Bmw-2006-650I-Convertible-Owners-Manual-694379 bmw-2006-650i-convertible-owners-manual-694379 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 236

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Owner's Manual
for Vehicle

The Ultimate
Driving Machine

Contents
A to Z

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

650i

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

© 2005 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 159 709
US English VIII/05, 05 09 510
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Entertainment

At a glance
Cockpit
iDrive
Voice command system

140 On/off and tone
144 Radio
153 CD player and CD changer

Communications

Controls
28
47
56
58
74
85

Opening and closing
Adjustments
Transporting children safely
Driving
Everything under control
Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
96 Lamps
100 Climate
106 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips

At a glance

Mobility
182
184
190
195
197
202

Refueling
Wheels and tires
Under the hood
Maintenance
Replacing components
Giving and receiving assistance

Reference
210 Technical data
213 Short commands of the voice command
system
217 Everything from A to Z

Mobility

114 Things to remember when driving

162 Telephoning
174 TeleService, BMW Assist

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

10
16
22

137 What to do if …

Controls

4
Notes
Reporting safety defects 7

120 Starting navigation system
121 Destination entry
132 Destination guidance

Navigation

Using this Owner's Manual

Navigation

Communications Entertainment

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 217.

Driving tips

Contents

Notes

Notes
Using this Owner's Manual

Symbols used

We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to use the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.

Should you want to sell your BMW some day,
please remember to hand over the Owner's
Manual as well; it is an important component of
your vehicle.

Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. technology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.

* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.

4
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In isolated cases it is possible that the features
described in this Owner's Manual could differ
from those on your vehicle.

Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.

At a glance

When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equipment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.

Controls

Editorial notice

Driving tips

The individual vehicle

5
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Notes

For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. Have corresponding
work on your BMW performed only by your
BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with appropriately trained personnel. If this work is not
carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<

Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect
the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See
your BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<

6
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 8311117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you and your dealer or BMW
of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

7
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510,
or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

At a glance

Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:

Controls

For U.S. customers

Driving tips

We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.

Navigation

Reporting safety defects

Communications Entertainment

Service and warranty

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Cockpit

Cockpit
All around the steering wheel: controls and displays

Convertible: opening and closing rear
window 39

Convertible: opening and closing windows
together 39

High beams, headlamp flasher 97

Convertible: opening and closing back
windows 38

High-beam assistant* 97

Opening and closing front windows 38

Adjusting exterior mirrors 52
Automatic parking function 53

Turn signals 64

Roadside parking lamps 97
Check Control 79
Computer 75

10
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

15 Releasing the hood 190
16 Opening luggage compartment lid 34
17

Head-Up Display* 93

Volume
18
Activating/deactivating voice
command system* 22
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers

Parking lamps 96
Low beams 96
Automatic headlamp control 96
Adaptive Head Light* 97

Instrument lighting 99

Individually programmable* 54
Front fog lamps 98

8
9

Communications Entertainment

Individually programmable 54
Instrument cluster 12
Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor 65

Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 58

11 Ignition lock 58
12 Horn: the entire surface
Steering wheel heater* 54

Mobility

Controls

> Press longer: redialing

Active cruise control* 67

Driving tips

> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing* for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected

Cruise control 66

At a glance

Mobile phone* 162

Navigation

Buttons on steering wheel

Steering wheel adjustment 53

11
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Indicator lamps for turn signals

Speedometer

> Odometer and trip odometer 74

Indicator and warning lamps 13

> Computer 75

Display for active cruise control* 70

Tachometer 74

> Date and remaining distance to be
driven for service requirements 77

Engine oil thermometer 75

Display for

> Automatic transmission
with Steptronic* 62
> SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox* 61

> Time/date 74

> Dynamic Driving Control 64

> Outside temperature 74

> High-beam assistant* 97

> Indicator and warning lamps 79
> Speed for cruise control 67
> Desired speed for active cruise
control* 70

Display for

>
9

Check Control message present 79

Fuel gauge 75

10 Resetting trip odometer 74

12
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

function or the appropriate actions to take, refer
to page 79.

The concept

In cases of corresponding urgency, this information is immediately displayed when the
associated lamps light up.

At a glance

Indicator and warning lamps

When the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on, some lamps are checked for
proper operation and light up briefly in the process.

Handbrake for Canadian models
Front fog lamps 98
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87
High beams/headlamp flasher 97

Explanatory text messages
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is controlling the drive
and braking forces to maintain vehicle
stability 87

You can consult Check Control for additional
information, e.g. regarding the cause of a mal-

13
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.

Driving tips

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors, both in the display area 1 and in the display 2

Navigation

Handbrake set 60

Communications Entertainment

The following indicator lamps in the display
area 1 indicate that certain functions are active:

Controls

Indicator lamps without text messages

Cockpit

All around the center console: controls and displays

14
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise
function* 40

Microphone for handsfree mode for
telephone*
and voice command system* 22
Convertible: microphone on steering
column

14 Player for navigation DVD in Professional*
navigation system 120

Reading lamps 99

Interior lamps 99

16 Switching audio sources on/off and
adjusting volume 141

Coupe: initiating emergency call* 202

Indicator/warning lamp for front passenger
airbag* 92

PDC Park Distance Control* 85

Convertible: initiating emergency
call* 202

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

Control Display 16

Hazard warning flashers

Heated seats 52

Convertible: opening the convertible top 42
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 42

Temperature setting,
left/right 100

18 Bracket for cup holder 109

Automatic air distribution and
volume 101

19 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in four
directions

Cooling function 102

20 Activating voice command system* 22

AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 103

21 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
22 Dynamic Driving Control 64

Maximum cooling 103
Residual heat mode 103
Switching off automatic climate
control 103
Air volume 102

Driving tips

Controls

15 Drive for audio CDs 140

Navigation

11 Automatic climate control 100

> audio CD 140

Communications Entertainment

10 Central locking system 32

> navigation DVD* 120

At a glance

13 Ejecting

Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 102
Mobility

Rear window defroster 100
12 Changing
> radio station 145

15
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

> track 140

iDrive

iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of
switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of individual functions is
described in connection with the relevant
equipment.

Controls

Control Display

button
Opening the start menu

Controller
You can use the controller to select menu
items and change settings by:

To avoid becoming distracted and unnecessarily endangering both your own vehicle's occupants and other road users, never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

> moving in four directions, arrow 4
> turning, arrow 5
> pressing, arrow 6

16
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> Telephone*
> BMW Assist* or TeleService*

With the ignition switch at radio readiness or
higher, refer to page 58, the following message
appears on the Control Display:

Controls

Navigation or onboard information
> Navigation system*
> Onboard info, e.g. for displaying of the
average fuel consumption

Driving tips

Entertainment
> Radio

Climate
> Air distribution
> Automatic program

To confirm the message:
Press the controller.
This opens the start menu.

Start menu
Navigation

> CD player and CD changer*

> Parked car ventilation

menu
> Switching off the Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of the service requirements and
dates for statutory emission and vehicle
inspections
> Settings for the telephone

At a glance

Communication

Basic operation

You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.

Opening start menu
Press the

button.

To open the start menu from the menu:
button twice.

17
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Press the

Communications Entertainment

Menu overview

iDrive

Opening menu items of start menu

Displays in menu

From the start menu, you can call up the four
menu items Communication, Navigation, Entertainment, and Climate by moving the controller
left, right, forward, or back. Depending on your
selection, the last menu opened will be displayed in each case.

Each menu is divided into fields. The currently selected field appears brighter.

A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:
Communication

You can open the menu by pressing the controller.

Navigation or onboard info

Comfort opening of menu items

Entertainment

Convenience opening offers you the option of:
> Opening a menu item of the start menu in
the view last selected

Climate

> Direct switching between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the
button

To do so, move the controller in the corresponding direction and hold it for longer than
approx. 2 seconds.

Menu items are usually grouped in horizontal or vertical lists.

Arrows indicate the possibility of accessing
other menu items that are not currently visible.

Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.

18
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

You can view the individual steps under Settings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to
page 82.

> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by marking

> Active field appears lighter

Activating a menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is carried out

> Release controller

Selecting a menu item: refer to 1

Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field

19
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Switching between fields:
> Briefly move controller left, right, forward
or back

> Turn the controller; the marking moves

Mobility

Selecting a menu item:

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.

At a glance

Operating principle at a glance

iDrive

Status information

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:

Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone* in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"*:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist

Entertainment sound output off

Display for:
>

> the computer or the trip computer
> the arrow display or map view in vehicles
equipped with navigation system*
> The current position

Selecting displays
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window and press the controller.

New entries present in "Missed calls"*

Roaming active

Telephoning* is possible if the mobile
phone is logged onto the vehicle
Reception strength in mobile phone
network depends on mobile phone

Time

Other displays:
When Check Control information appears or
entries are made via the voice command system*, the status information is temporarily
hidden.

2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.

20
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Switching assistance window on/off
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window and press the controller.

Driving tips

Controls

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.

Navigation

To switch on, switch to the assistance window
and press the controller.

Switching Control Display
on/off

Communications Entertainment

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the controller.

21
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

To switch on, press the controller.

Voice command system

Voice command system*
The concept

Voice commands

The voice command system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.

Activating voice command system
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.

Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
spoken commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system includes a special
microphone.
The microphone is located:
> Near the interior rearview mirror in the
Coupe, refer to page 14
> On the steering column in the Convertible

This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
command system is ready to respond to
commands.

Prerequisite
In order to enable identification of the commands to be spoken, use iDrive to set the language for the voice command system. Setting
iDrive language, refer to page 84.

Symbol in the Owner's Manual
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates the responses of the voice
command system.

2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.

22
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}

{Cancel}

Driving tips

Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possible commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible commands:
{Options}

4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD player switched on}}

For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer.

Opening help
{Help}

Using alternative commands
There are often several commands for running
a function, e.g.:
{Settings menu} or {i menu}

Running functions directly with short
commands

At a glance
Controls

Press the
button on the steering wheel or in
the center console
or

2. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.

5. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}

Navigation

Terminating or canceling voice input

An example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.

Communications Entertainment

This symbol appears on the Control Display
when it is possible to input additional commands.
If no other commands are possible, then operate the equipment using iDrive.

Opening start menu
{Main menu}

23
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

You can use short commands to carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 213.

Voice command system

Notes
The mobile phone can also be operated
by voice commands, refer to page 170.<
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
> Always say the commands in the language
of voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
usual pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbreviations.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof* or convertible top closed to prevent
interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid background noises in the vehicle
while speaking.

24
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety, comfort
and convenience, are described here.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Opening and closing

Opening and closing
Keys/remote control

Remote control with integrated key

Spare key

Adapter for spare key, in glove compartment

Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. You should use the remote control at
least twice a year in order to maintain the
charge condition. For equipment with comfort
access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 38.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different settings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 29.
Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 195.

Integrated key

Press the button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Hotel function, refer to page 33
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 34.

New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.

Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key of the remote
control fit the same locks.

Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.

28
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences.
Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls.

Personal Profile settings
> When unlocking with the remote control,
either unlock only the driver's door or
unlock the entire vehicle, refer to page 30
> Locking the vehicle after a short time or
after starting to drive, refer to page 32
> Assigning the programmable buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 54

> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 83
> Date format, refer to page 83
> Displaying optical warning for the PDC Park
Distance Control*, refer to page 85
> Selection and brightness of the display for
the Head-Up Display*, refer to page 94
> Air distribution, temperature in the upper
body region, and intensity for the automatic
climate control, refer to page 101
> Adjusting the voice instructions for the destination guidance of the navigation system*, refer to page 135
The most recent settings for the following are
also called up during unlocking:
> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steeringwheel position, refer to page 49
> The volume and tone settings for audio
sources, refer to page 141
> The display of the stored stations for the
radio, refer to page 144
> The volume setting for the telephone, refer
to page 166

Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for operation whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system either locks or unlocks all of the following:
> Doors
> Compartment in the front center console

At a glance
Controls

Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter.

Driving tips

> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 84

Navigation

> Units of measure for consumption,
route/distances, temperature and pressure, refer to page 83

Communications Entertainment

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 83

Mobility

> Display settings for the Control Display:

> Fuel filler door
29
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

> Luggage compartment lid

Opening and closing

Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access* via the door handles

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

These actions operate the anti-theft system at
the same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door handles. The alarm system is likewise armed/disarmed. The interior lamps and the courtesy
lamps* are also switched on and off with the
remote control.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system on page 35.

Operating from inside
Via the central locking button, refer to page 32.
The fuel filler door and the compartment in the
front center console are not locked, refer to
page 32.
In the event of a serious accident, the central
locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning flashers and interior lamps are also
switched on.

Opening and closing: from
outside

5. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
6. Select "Unlock button" and press the controller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the
button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"*
Press the
button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.

Using the remote control
Because any persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always keep
the remote control with you when you leave the
vehicle; this precaution ensures that you will
remain able to unlock the vehicle from the outside at all times.<
8. Press the controller.

Unlocking
You can use the
button to unlock the vehicle
depending on the current setting.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

Convenience opening mode

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Press the

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

button longer:

> Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass
sunroof* is raised and the sliding visor
slides back.

30
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

5. Select "Confirmation" and press the controller.

Watch the convertible top during the
opening process to be sure that no
one is injured. Releasing the button stops
the operation.<

button.

Switching on interior lamps

Panic mode*

Malfunctions

You can also trigger the alarm system in case of
danger:

Local radio waves can disrupt the function of
the remote control.
Should the remote control fail to operate owing
to interference of this kind, unlock and lock the
vehicle via the door lock using the key.

Press the

button for at least three seconds.

To switch off alarm: press any button.

Opening luggage compartment lid
Press the

button for approx. 1 second.

The luggage compartment lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.

A previously locked luggage compartment lid is also locked again after closing.
Coupe: during opening, the luggage compartment lid pivots back and up. Make sure there is
sufficient clearance.<

For US owners only

Setting confirmation signals

FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2

You can set confirmation signals to acknowledge the locking and unlocking of the vehicle.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device may not cause harmful interference, and

31
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

7. Press the controller.
The signals are switched on.

Driving tips

6. Select the desired signal.

Communications Entertainment

button.

You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.

Mobility

If the vehicle is locked, press the

Reference

Press the

Controls

Locking doors

At a glance

> Convertible: the windows and the convertible top are opened.

Opening and closing

> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Opening and closing: from
inside

Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using door lock

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door
remains unlocked.
You can also make the following settings:

When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.

> The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle after a short time when no
door has been opened.

2. A second turn of the key unlocks the passenger door and luggage compartment lid.

> The central locking system automatically
locks the vehicle as soon as you start to
drive.

Convenience operation

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

You can also use the door lock to operate the
windows and the glass sunroof* in the Coupe
or to operate the windows and the top in the
Convertible.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

> To open:
With the door closed, turn the key to the
Unlock position and hold it there.
> To close:
With the door closed, turn the key to the
Lock position and hold it there.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.
5. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.

Keep a close eye on the closing process
and also on the opening process of the
convertible top to be sure that no one is injured.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<

Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn the key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
6. Select "Relock door if not opened"
or "Lock after driving".
32
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> Either unlock both doors at the same time
with the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the
armrest or

Locking doors
> Use the central locking button to lock both
of the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of the desired
door. To prevent you from being locked out,
the open driver's door cannot be locked
using the lock button.
Because any persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always keep
the remote control with you when you leave the
vehicle; this precaution ensures that you will
remain able to unlock the vehicle from the outside at all times.<

At a glance
Driving tips

> pull the door handle for each door twice: the
first pull unlocks the door, and the second
one opens it.

Controls

Unlocking and opening doors

The hotel function locks the compartment in
the front center console and the luggage compartment lid separately and disconnects them
from the central locking system. If you hand
over the remote control without the integrated
key, refer to page 28, e.g. at a hotel, then this
prevents access to the luggage compartment
and to the compartment in the front center console.

Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration,
until the key slot points in the direction of travel
and then remove:
The hotel function is only activated after subsequent locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The
system locks the luggage compartment lid and
the compartment in the front center console
and disconnects them from the central locking
system.

Manual release
In order to manually unlock the compartment in
the front center console in the event of an electrical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the
right until it reaches the stop.

33
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

If unlocking was manual, the lock must be
returned to the home position, i.e. all the
way back to the left, before reactivation of the
hotel function.<

Navigation

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Hotel function

Communications Entertainment

7. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.

Opening and closing

Luggage compartment lid

Manual release

During opening, the luggage compartment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
there is sufficient clearance.<

Opening from inside

The luggage compartment lid lock is located
under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to
page 28, fit the luggage-compartment lid lock.
Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
Press the button:
The luggage compartment lid opens, provided
that it is not locked or the hotel function is not
activated, refer to the above section.

Opening from outside

If you use the lock to open the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent
this, you should deactivate the alarm beforehand.
If the alarm has been triggered accidentally,
switch off the alarm, refer to page 35.<

Emergency release

Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or
press the
button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second:
the luggage compartment lid opens.
Convertible: if the convertible top is not
completely open or closed, then the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer
to page 42.<

Pull lever in luggage compartment. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Only drive with the luggage compartment lid
completely closed, otherwise exhaust can penetrate into the passenger compartment.<

34
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

To do so, unfold the handle and press it downward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow.
This moves the convertible top compartment
floor into the raised position.

The convertible top cannot be opened if
the convertible top compartment floor is
in the raised position.<

Luggage compartment
There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners
of the luggage compartment for securing luggage nets* or securing straps to fix luggage in
position.
Also refer to Securing cargo, page 117.

Convertible: increasing luggage
compartment capacity

> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the
luggage compartment lid
> To movements in the vehicle interior: interior motion sensor, see below
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> by triggering an acoustic alarm
> by switching on the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid,
even with the system armed, by using the
button of the remote control, refer to page 31.
When the luggage compartment lid is closed, it
is once again locked and monitored.

Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30, or
With the convertible top closed, you can
enlarge the luggage compartment capacity.

> insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock, refer to page 58.
35

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips

The vehicle alarm system responds:

Navigation

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic
climate control to a high level, refer to
page 102.

The concept

Communications Entertainment

1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass
sunroof*.
Convertible: with the convertible top
closed, close all windows, including the rear
window.

Alarm system

Mobility

If special circumstances should make it absolutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the
luggage compartment lid open:

Reference

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.

Controls

Before opening the convertible top, execute
this procedure in reverse order.

Opening and closing

Indicator lamp displays

even if the convertible top is open. Falling
objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms,
refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.

Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In stacking garages
> The indicator lamp below the interior rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.

> When transporting on car-carrying trains

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors or luggage compartment lid are not
properly closed. Even if you do not close the
alerted area, the system begins to monitor
the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sensor
is not activated.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor

> After the vehicle is unlocked, the indicator
lamp goes out: no manipulation or
attempted intrusions have been detected in
the period since the system was armed.

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Press the
button on the remote control
once again immediately after locking.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.

Comfort access*

> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: an attempted entry has
been detected in the period since the system was armed.

Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote control in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.

Tilt alarm sensor

Comfort access supports the following functions:

Monitors the inclination of the vehicle. The
alarm system reacts, for example, if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor
Coupe:
In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass sunroof*
must be completely closed.
Convertible:
Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat
cushions. This means that the alarm system,
including the interior motion sensor, is armed

> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Starting engine
> Comfort locking

Functional requirement
> The vehicle can only be unlocked if the
vehicle detects that the remote control carried is located outside the vehicle.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

36
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected in the vehicle, it is
only possible to restart the engine within
approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.

Switching off engine with automatic
transmission

Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.

The engine can only be switched off in the
selector lever position P, refer to page 60.
To switch off the engine in the selector lever
position N, the remote control must be inserted
in the ignition lock.

If a remote control is detected in the interior
after unlocking, the electric steering-wheel lock
disengages, refer to page 58.

Before driving into a car wash with
automatic transmission

Locking doors

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock.

Touch the surface, arrow 2 on the driver's door
or 3 on the passenger door with a finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the
button.
For comfort closing, hold a finger on the surface, arrow 2 or 3.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
luggage compartment is detected inside
the locked vehicle after the luggage compartment lid has been closed, then the luggage
compartment lid opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal*
sounds.<

2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Place selector lever in position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.

At a glance
Controls

You can start the engine or switch on the ignition if a remote control is located on the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the ignition lock, refer to page 58.

Driving tips

Unlocking

Starting engine

Navigation

The special features when using comfort
access are described below.

When doing so, do not depress the brake
pedal; otherwise, the engine will start
immediately.<

Communications Entertainment

It is basically irrelevant whether you operate the
above-mentioned functions with the comfort
access feature or by pressing the buttons on
the remote control. Before doing so, please
familiarize yourself with the information on
opening and closing, starting on page 28.

By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 58.

Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then
open or close the vehicle with the buttons on
the remote control or with a key. To start the
engine after this, insert the remote control in the
ignition lock.

37
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

Special features in contrast to ordinary
remote control

Switching on radio readiness

Reference

> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control carried is
located in the vehicle.

Opening and closing

Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced occasionally.
1. Remove integrated key from remote control, refer to page 28.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing
To close the side windows while the vehicle is being driven, always close the rear
windows first or all four windows simultaneously; otherwise, the windows cannot close
tightly at higher speeds.<

Individually

2. Remove cover.
3. Insert new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collection point or to your BMW center.<

Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure themselves.<

Coupe: opening, closing

> Press the switch down to the resistance
point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.

> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open for as long
as you hold down the switch.

38
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

After switching off ignition

2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
All windows, including the rear window,
continue to open as long as you press
the switch.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening
movement.
Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.

Rear window

You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, but in the
Convertible, this is only true as long as no door
has been opened.
For information on using the convenience operation mode at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to Locking doors on page 37.

Anti-trapping mechanism
If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will immediately stop moving the window prior to lowering it slightly.
Convertible: the rear side windows and
rear window are not equipped with an
anti-trapping mechanism.<

1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in the button 1 and the switch 2
light up for approx. 10 seconds.
2. Press switch 2:
> Down to the resistance point:
The rear window continues to open for
as long as you hold down the switch.

Despite the anti-trapping mechanism,
you should inspect the travel path of the
front side window prior to closing it, as the
safety feature could fail to detect certain kinds
of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and
the window would continue closing.
Pulling the switch beyond the resistance point
and holding it limits the response of the antitrapping mechanism. In this case, the window
will respond to forces beyond a defined threshold by opening only slightly.
If you pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there,
39

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

The rear window opens and closes automatically when you open or close the convertible top.<

Driving tips

1. Briefly press button 1:
The LEDs in the button 1 and the switch 2
light up for approx. 10 seconds.

Navigation

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the
function. The LEDs go out.

Communications Entertainment

> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The rear window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the
opening movement.

Mobility

You can close the rear window in the
same manner by pulling the switch.

Reference

Together

Opening and closing

the anti-trapping mechanism will be deactivated.<

Accessories in window area
After installing any accessory within the travel
range of the window – such as a clamp-on
antenna for a mobile phone, you will need to
have the system reinitialized for use under the
new conditions. Please contact your BMW center for assistance.

Coupe:
Glass sunroof, electric with
raise function*
The glass sunroof and sliding visor are operational whenever the ignition is switched on.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure themselves.<

Raising and closing glass sunroof

> Briefly press the switch:
The sunroof opens and the sliding visor
moves back approx. 2 in/5 cm
or
press the switch twice past the resistance
point toward the rear:
The sunroof opens and the sliding visor
moves completely back.

> To close, briefly press the switch or push it
twice beyond the resistance point toward
the front:
The sunroof and sliding visor close.

Opening and closing sliding visor
> Push the switch up to the resistance point in
the desired direction:
The sliding visor continues to move for as
long as you hold the switch.
> Push the switch beyond the resistance
point in the desired direction:
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Briefly press the switch again in any direction to stop the movement.
For information on using the convenience operation mode at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to Locking doors on page 37.

Anti-trapping mechanism
If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when
closing, the closing action is interrupted and the
glass sunroof opens.
If the sliding visor encounters resistance when
closing within the last approx. 8 in/20 cm, the
closing action is interrupted and the sliding
visor opens again slightly.
Despite the anti-trapping mechanism,
you should inspect the sunroof's travel
range prior to closing it, as the safety feature
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof
would continue closing.
Pressing the switch beyond the resistance
point and holding it deactivates the antitrapping mechanism.<

Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After an interruption in the power supply the
glass sunroof may not move. The system has to
be initialized. Should this occur, please have the
sunroof initialized at your BMW center.

40
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Sliding visor

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the panorama glass sunroof and the sliding visor manually.

1. Fold the cover downward, if necessary
using the screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 197.

At a glance

Moving manually

Glass sunroof

Convertible: top
3. Use the Allen wrench to move the glass
sunroof in the desired direction.

The fully automatic convertible top combines
secure weather protection with simple and convenient operation.
Here are a few tips for getting the maximum
pleasure from your Convertible:
> It is advisable to close the convertible top
when the vehicle is parked. The closed convertible top not only protects the passenger
compartment from unforeseen weather
damage, it also provides a certain amount of
protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if
the convertible top is closed, only keep
valuables in the locked luggage compartment.
> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the
convertible top.
41

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

3. Use the Allen wrench to move the sliding
visor in the desired direction.

Reference

2. Insert Allen wrench from onboard tool kit,
refer to page 197, into the opening provided.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard tool kit into the opening provided.

Driving tips

Controls

1. Remove cover on headliner in front of rear
window. To do so, lift slightly, arrows 1.
Grasp behind the cover, arrows 2 and pull
firmly downward.

Opening and closing

In order to avoid damage, do not operate
the convertible top at temperatures
below +147/–106.
Do not leave the convertible top in its storage
compartment for longer than one day when wet;
otherwise, damage from moisture can occur.
Do not place any objects on the convertible top;
otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these
objects could fall off and lead to damage or
injury.
Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is raised.
Driving without having completed the opening
or closing action can lead to damage or injury.
Do not place hands in the top mechanism during the opening and closing action. Keep children away from the travel path of the convertible top.
For safety reasons, do not operate the convertible top unless the vehicle is stationary.<
If you have initiated top operation with the
vehicle at a stop and then start to drive,
e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the
initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/
30 km/h:
To do so, press and hold the corresponding
button.<
Partial vacuums that occur at higher
speeds in the passenger compartment
can make the convertible top flap. Use the automatic climate control to increase the air supply
so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not
occur.<

Prior to opening and closing
> Read the safety precautions above carefully
and comply with them fully.
> Make sure that the convertible top compartment floor in the luggage compartment
is in the lowered position, refer to page 35;
otherwise, the convertible top cannot be
opened.
> Make sure that the luggage compartment
lid is closed.

Opening and closing
Ignition key in radio ready position or higher,
refer to page 58, with the vehicle stationary:
To avoid putting excessive strain on the
battery, operate the convertible top only
when the engine is running, if possible.
Before closing the convertible top, remove foreign objects from the windshield frame, as
these might inhibit closing of the convertible
top.<

Closing

LED

Opening

When the button for operating the convertible top is pressed, the side windows
move downward slightly and the rear window is
lowered completely.
If you hold down the button after the LED 2
goes out, then the windows travel upward
again.
If the convertible top is not completely open or
closed, then the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened.<

LED
In the following situations, in addition to the
LED, a message is displayed on the Control
Display and an acoustic signal may sound:
> During convertible top operation, the LED
lights up green. It goes out as soon as the
opening or closing action is finished.
> If the LED flashes red when you release the
button, the opening or closing action has
not yet finished.

42
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

If the convertible top is not completely
open or closed, then the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened.<

Convenience operation with the
remote control and via the door lock
Refer to pages 30 and 32.

Manual closing
Only close the convertible top manually if
absolutely necessary; never open it manually. The convertible top compartment lid cannot be locked in the event of an electrical malfunction and would open while the vehicle is
being driven.
Improper handling can lead to damage.<

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage compartment with the screwdriver and then pull
firmly. This unlocks the convertible top
compartment lid.

4. Close luggage compartment lid.
During manual convertible top operation, the luggage compartment lid
cannot be opened.<
5. Completely open the side windows and the
rear window.
If the rear window cannot be opened using
the switch, it must be lowered manually.

Opening rear window manually
1. Pry out the cover between the rear head
restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver
as close as possible to the locking elements, as shown in the illustration.

2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible
into the opening and turn firmly in the direc-

43
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

A convertible top which is not completely
opened or closed presents a danger.
Do not interrupt and continue the closing action
several times in succession; otherwise, the top
mechanism can be damaged.<

2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver
from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 197.

Communications Entertainment

The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted immediately if the button for top
operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pressing
the appropriate button.
If the opening or closing action is interrupted for
a longer period, the convertible top remains in
that position for approx. 15 minutes before it
slowly moves to a stable position.

1. Open luggage compartment lid.

Mobility

Interruption

Before closing

Reference

> If the LED lights up red when the button is
pressed, either the floor of the convertible
top storage compartment in the luggage
compartment is in the raised position or a
malfunction has occurred. The convertible
top cannot be moved.

Opening and closing

tion indicated by the arrow until the rear
window is completely open.

3. In concert with the other person, pull the
two sides of the convertible top out simultaneously and pivot forward. In doing so, keep
the convertible top compartment lid open,
arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.

Closing
Perform the following work steps with the
assistance of a second person and with
the doors open to prevent injury and damage to
the convertible top.<
1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the
side panel forward. Reach into the resulting
openings and raise the convertible top
compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.

2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and
right side frame, arrow 3.
Lifting the convertible top by parts
other than the side frame can damage
it.<

4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as
they will go, arrow 5, and close the convertible top-compartment lid, arrow 6.
Do not raise the convertible top ends
until after the convertible top has
been swung forward; otherwise, damage
can occur.<

5. Fold the top ends down onto the convertible-top compartment lid.
6. From the interior, take out the cover in the
center of the front top frame; use a screwdriver if necessary.

44
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

1. Remove the wind deflector from the protective sleeve and fold it open, refer to
arrows 1.

At a glance

Before installing

10. If necessary, close the rear window again
manually in the same way as above.

Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps the air movement in
the passenger compartment to a minimum
when the convertible top is open, thus enabling
pleasant driving even at higher speeds.

4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.

The wind deflector is stowed in a protective
sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short
instructions for use are also provided on the
protective sleeve.

1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflector into the appropriate opening on the right
side of the vehicle.

Installing

2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the receptacles provided.

45
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.

Mobility

9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the
arrow until the front convertible top frame is
locked to the windshield frame.
The rear convertible top ends are pressed
automatically onto the convertible top compartment lid and close tightly with tension.

2. Press the upper and lower section together
until the locking device engages, refer to
arrow 2.

Reference

8. From the outside, both persons pull the
front frame of the convertible top downward, as simultaneously as possible on the
two sides.

Driving tips

Controls

7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening
provided.

Opening and closing

3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into
the appropriate opening until it snaps into
place.

4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflector.
With wind deflector fitted: do not incline
the front seat backrests too far backward
if the seat is to be moved back to the end position; otherwise, the wind deflector will be damaged.<

Removing
The same as installing, but in reverse order.

Folding up

1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the
wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle
all the way back and release the locking
mechanism.
2. Fold in the upper and lower section.

46
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Adjustments
Head restraints

Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
knee and front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, the
occurrence of injuries resulting from contact
with airbags cannot be entirely ruled out,
depending on the circumstances. The ignition
and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing
loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This
effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 90.

Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats.
Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats that are each
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap.
Expectant mothers should always wear their
safety belts, taking care to position the lap belt
against the lower hips, where it will not exert
pressure against the abdominal area.
Do not route the belt across your neck, or run it
across sharp edges. Be sure that the belt does
not become caught or jammed. Make sure that
the safety belt is securely fastened across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible without it being twisted or tangled. Be sure
not to route it over solid or breakable objects;
otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the
lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly and pull the shoulder
belt upward periodically to readjust the tension
across your lap in order to avoid a reduction in
the retention effect of the safety belt.<
For instructions on operating safety belts, refer
to page 51.

47
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Controls
Driving tips

Head restraints, refer to page 50.

Navigation

Airbags

Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<

Communications Entertainment

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 56.

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.

Mobility

The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimum efficiency, we strongly urge you to follow the instructions contained in the following
section.

Reference

Sitting safely

Adjustments

With the sports seat*, you can also adjust the
thigh support manually:

Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
operating the vehicle. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger side as well, do not tilt
the backrest too far toward the rear. Failure to
observe this precaution can prevent the belt
from providing effective protection against
injury, as the passenger could slide under the
belt in an accident.<
Also follow the instructions regarding damage
to the safety belt on page 52.

Pull the lever and move the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.

Lumbar support* adjustment

Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted,
do not incline the front seat backrests too
far backward if the seat is to be moved back to
the end position; otherwise, the wind deflector
will be damaged.<

Seat adjustment
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 47.<

You can also adjust the contours of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear of switch.
> Move curvature up or down:
Press top or bottom of switch.

Inclination

Longitudinal direction

Height

Backrest

Convertible: head restraints, refer to
page 50

48
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel
is immediately interrupted if you operate the
switch for the steering wheel adjustment in any
direction, refer to page 53.

At a glance

Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.

The last positions of the driver's seat, external
rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote key currently in use.

Storing

You can choose when the position is requested:

1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 58.

> Request when unlocking vehicle

2. Adjust the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering-wheel positions.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

3. Press the
button:
The LED in the button lights up.

> Request when opening driver's door
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.

4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3:
The LED goes out.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

Requesting

4. Select "Door locks" and press the controller.

Do not request a position from the memory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<

Convenience mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 58.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1,
2 or 3.
The system immediately cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of
the seat adjustment switches or one of the
memory buttons.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the controller.
6. Select "Last seat pos." and press the controller.

49
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips

Activating with remote control

Navigation

If the
button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.

Communications Entertainment

You can store and select three different adjustment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel.

Mobility

2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.

Reference

1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition
on or off, refer to page 58.

Controls

Safety feature

Adjustments

7. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".

To reach the lowest position, press the
button, refer to arrow 1.<

Adjusting tilt angle
Swivel the head restraints.

Removal
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the
head restraint.
8. Press the controller.

Installation

To cancel the request:
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.

Insert head restraint into the sockets and
adjust.

When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. If you fail to
do so, any persons or objects behind the seat
could be injured or damaged by a rearward
movement of the seat.<

Convertible
Adjusting height

Front head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<

> To raise: move the switch upward.

Coupe

Adjusting tilt angle

> To lower: move the switch downward.

Adjusting height

Swivel the head restraints.
> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.
> To lower: slide the head restraint downward.
50
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Lock backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when the backrest is not
locked. At the same time, an additional
message appears on the Control Display.

Safety belts

Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest forward.
The lever is designed so that the safety belt can
be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten
the safety belt more conveniently.

To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 47.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats.
Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.

At a glance
Communications Entertainment

Convertible: releasing backrest

Controls

Coupe: releasing backrest

Driving tips

Before starting to drive, fold backrests
back, otherwise there is the danger of
accident due to an unexpected movement of
the seat.<

You can lock the backrest in place when it
is folded forward. This is useful, for example, when you get into the vehicle while it is
parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audibly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not
have to use lever 1 to release it.<

Navigation

Getting in back

The belt system integrated into the seat makes
it easier to get in back.
1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest forward.

4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has
moved back into its previous position. If you
release button 3 before this, the seat stops
in its current position.

Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.

51
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

3. After passengers have gotten in back, fold
the backrest back and lock it in place.

Mobility

2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has
moved into the desired position.

Adjustments

Releasing
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in
the correct position for adults of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 48.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. At the same time, an additional message appears on the Control
Display. Please check whether safety belts are
being worn correctly.

button. The maximum preselected temperature
is supplied when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off:
Press the button longer.

Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based what you see in the mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased accident
risk.<

The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed onto the passenger
seat.

Damage to safety belts
In case of strain due to an accident or
damage, replace the belt system including the safety belt tensioners and have the belt
anchor points checked. Have this work carried
out only by a BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise
correct operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<

Heated seats

Adjustments

Switching to the other mirror or to the automatic parking function, refer to Tilting down
passenger-side mirror on page 53

Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on page 49.

Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.

Folding exterior mirrors in and out
To prevent the exterior mirrors from being
damaged due to the width of the vehicle,
always fold them in by hand before entering an
automatic car wash.<
The temperature setting advances one step in
its control sequence each time you press the

52
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of accident as the result of unexpected movement.<

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Also
do not attach stickers to the windshield in front
of the mirror.

Tilting down passenger-side mirror automatic parking function

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.

Activating

Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory,
page 49.

1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.

At a glance
Navigation

The interior mirror is provided with two photocells to control its automatic dimming function.
One is integrated into the mirror glass, refer to
arrow, while the other is located at a position
slightly offset from this on the back of the mirror
housing.

Controls

Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.

Driving tips

Deactivating

Electric steering wheel lock
The steering wheel locks or unlocks automatically when the remote control is removed or
inserted, refer to page 58.

Easy entry/exit
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the steering wheel temporarily moves into the
uppermost position.

53
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

> When the vehicle is moving forward, the
interior and exterior mirrors dim as a function of the incoming light.

Mobility

> Both exterior mirrors are automatically
heated when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on.

2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when parking, etc.

Reference

Automatic functions

Adjustments

Steering wheel heater*

A list of various functions is displayed:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions of the navigation system*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated air
control on page 103
> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources

Press the button with the ignition switched on.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up when
the steering wheel heater is switched on.

Programmable buttons* on steering
wheel

> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers displayed
> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. Select the button if necessary and press the
controller.

You can program the buttons individually.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

You can now activate the selected function
using the corresponding button.

4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

54
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Activating selected function
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:

Controls

> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.

55
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.

Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
In principle, all seats in your BMW are suitable,
with the exception of the driver's seat, for
mounting universal child restraint systems for
all age classes approved for the respective age
group.

Children always in back
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
under 5 ft/150 cm in height must be transported in back, seated in child restraint systems
which correspond to the age, weight and height
of the child. Otherwise there is an increased
danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.

Installing child-restraint
systems
Follow child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions for the selection,
installation and use of child restraint systems.
Otherwise the degree of protection they offer
may be reduced.<
Commercially available child restraint systems
are designed to be secured with a lap belt or
with the lap belt section of a three-point belt.
Incorrectly or improperly installed child restraint
systems can increase the risk of injury for children. Always follow the instructions for installing the system exactly.

On front passenger seat
Before installing a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat, make sure
that the front, knee and side airbag on the front
passenger side are deactivated. Otherwise
there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags
are triggered.<

Seat height

All rear seat positions in your vehicle comply
with the recommendations of the standard
SAE J1819 for the safe securing of child
restraint systems in motor vehicles.

Before mounting a universal child-restraint system, move the front passenger seat into the
highest position to achieve the best possible
belt routing. Do not change this seat height.

Exception for front passenger seat

Child seat security

Should it be necessary to use a childrestraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front, knee and side airbag on the passenger side must be deactivated. Otherwise,
there is an increased risk of injury for the child
if the airbags are triggered, even with a childrestraint system. Your BMW center will be glad
to advise you.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 91.

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.

56
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

LATCH child-restraint fixing system

1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.

LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

To attach a LATCH child's seat, follow the
operating and safety instructions of the
child's seat manufacturer.<

Rear seats

Controls

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.

At a glance

Locking safety belt

Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.

Coupe: child restraint system with
tether strap
The anchorage points for the LATCH childrestraint fixing system are located underneath
the identifying symbol. They are not visible from
the outside.

Communications Entertainment

Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull
the belt away from the region of the childrestraint fixing system.

Navigation

Driving tips

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in completely.

There are two additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows.

1. Fold anchor fitting into upright position.
2. Push head restraint downward.
3. Guide tether strap over head restraint and
hook onto anchor fitting.

57
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Placement of tether strap

Driving

Driving
Ignition lock

Start/Stop button

Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button several
times switches the radio readiness or the ignition on and off.

> Radio readiness switches on.
Some electrical devices are ready for operation.
> The electric steering-wheel lock audibly
disengages.
Before moving the vehicle, insert the
remote control into the ignition lock;
otherwise, the electric steering-wheel lock will
not be unlocked and the vehicle cannot be
steered.<

Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Briefly press in the remote control; it pops out
slightly.

Briefly pressing the Start/Stop button
with the brake or clutch pedal depressed
starts the engine.<

Radio readiness
Some electrical devices are ready for operation.
The time and outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> the moment the remote control is removed
from the ignition lock
> with comfort access* by touching the sensitive surface on the door handle, refer to
Locking doors on page 37

At the same time:
> The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.

Ignition on

> The electric steering-wheel lock audibly
engages.

Most indicator and warning lamps in the display
area 1 of the instrument cluster, refer to
page 13, light up for different periods.

Automatic transmission

Radio readiness and ignition off

The remote control can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P: interlock.

All indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

58
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automatically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
If the engine fails to start, depress the
brake pedal and press the selector lever
to the right and then back into position N.
Watch the display in the instrument cluster
while doing so.<

Special starting conditions
Depress the accelerator pedal halfway when
starting the engine in the following situations:
> The engine fails to start on the first attempt,
e.g. if it is very hot or cold.
> The engine is started at very low temperatures below approx. +5 7/–15 6 and at
high altitudes over approx. 3,300 ft/
1,000 m.

Manual transmission
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the
idling position.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automatically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.

Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automat-

Avoid frequent starting in quick succession or repeated start attempts in which
the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned at all or is burned inadequately and
there is a danger of overheating and damage to
the catalytic converter.<

Switching engine off
Do not remove the remote control from
the ignition lock while the vehicle is rolling; otherwise, the steering wheel lock would
engage while steering.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking on a downhill slope, apply the
handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle could roll.<

59
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

Driving tips

2. Move the selector lever into position N and
make sure that this position is also indicated in the instrument cluster.

Navigation

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive immediately at a moderate engine speed.

1. Depress brake pedal.

Communications Entertainment

When starting the engine, do not press the
accelerator pedal.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox*

Mobility

Do not run the engine in closed rooms;
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
engage the handbrake and move the selectorlever into position P or shift into neutral before
leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

ically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.

Reference

Starting engine

Driving

Manual transmission

Releasing

1. Briefly press the Start/Stop button with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Apply the handbrake.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox*
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Move selector lever into a drive position.
3. Briefly press Start/Stop button.
If the transmission is in N when the engine is
switched off, you will be given an optical and
acoustic reminder.

Automatic transmission*
1. Move the selector lever into position P with
the vehicle stopped.
2. Briefly press Start/Stop button.

Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes
the rear wheels.

Pull slightly upward, press the button and lower
the lever.
If it becomes necessary under special circumstances to use the handbrake while
driving, it must not be pulled too sharply. In
doing so, continuously press the button of the
handbrake lever. Otherwise strong application
of the handbrake can lead to overbraking of the
rear axle and associated 'fishtailing' of the vehicle rear end.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally engage the handbrake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lamps do not light up when the handbrake is engaged.<

Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a signal also sounds when starting off. The
handbrake is engaged.

Manual transmission

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Engaging
The lever engages automatically.

When shifting into 5th/6th gear, press the
selector-lever toward the right, otherwise
an inadvertent shift into 3rd or 4th gear could
lead to engine damage.<

60
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox*
The concept
The SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox is an
automated manual transmission in which an
electrohydraulic system handles the clutching
and gear changes.

The transmission automatically shifts
into N if the driver's door is opened with
the engine running and neither the pedals, the
shift paddles nor the selector-lever are operated.
This is indicated by an acoustic signal and the
flashing display N in the instrument cluster.<

Gear display

It offers the following functions:

> Choice of two drive programs: Normal or
Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving Control
page 64
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against incorrect shifting even in sequential
operation
> Acceleration assistant, refer to page 64.

Selector-lever positions

At a glance
Navigation

You operate the SMG using the selector-lever
in the center console and two shift paddles on
the steering wheel.
> Choice of manual or automatic mode:
Sequential mode or Drive mode

Controls

The backup lamps switch on automatically with
the ignition switched on.

> D: activate/deactivate the Drive mode

Driving tips

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Press the gearshift lever to the left, overcoming
a slight resistance.

> One-touch functions for Sequential mode:
+: manual upshifting
–: manual downshifting

R N 1 to 6
The currently engaged gear is displayed preceded by a D in Drive mode.
This display is your only way to be sure
the desired selector lever position is actually engaged.<

Shiftlock
Press the brake pedal before shifting out of N;
the shift command will not be executed unless
the brake is applied.

R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Communications Entertainment

Reverse gear

The current selector-lever position is displayed
in the center console.
> R: Reverse gear
> N: Neutral, idle

You can shift up and down using the shifting
paddles or the selector-lever. You do not need
to remove your foot from the accelerator to
do so.

61
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

After every engine start, as soon as the selector
lever is pushed to the right and the brake pedal
is pressed, the Sequential mode is activated.

Mobility

Sequential mode

Driving

It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g.
in slippery conditions.

Using shift paddles on steering wheel

In the following situations, SMG does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, the system will not execute a
downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev.
> When the vehicle is stationary, the transmission automatically downshifts into first
gear.

> To shift up, pull one of the shift paddles.
> To shift down, press.

> Shortly before dropping below a geardependent minimum speed, the transmission downshifts automatically even without
your intervention.

Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*

D Drive mode

In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
also shift manually with Steptronic, refer to
page 63.

In the Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
To switch from Sequential to Drive mode:
Briefly press the selector-lever to the right
toward D.
Kick-down: for rapid acceleration, e.g. passing,
press the accelerator pedal as far down as it will
go. You achieve maximum acceleration.

Selector-lever positions
P R N D M/S + –

Displays in instrument cluster

To switch back to the Sequential mode: press
selector-lever to the right again toward D or
shift using the shifting paddles or the selectorlever.
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by applying the throttle, but engage the handbrake instead. Otherwise, overheating can occur in the region of the
transmission.<

P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector-lever position is indicated, and in
manual mode, the gear currently engaged.

Gear changes
Using selector-lever
> To upshift, pull the selector-lever back.
> To downshift, push the selector-lever forward.

Changing selector-lever positions
> Only move the selector-lever from
position P with the engine running: interlock.
> With the vehicle stopped, press the brake
before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the
selector lever is blocked: shiftlock.

62
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Sport program and manual
operation M/S

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral
You can select N in car washes, for example.
The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation.
All forward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in position D.

Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum acceleration:
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the fullthrottle resistance point.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. If
this occurs, the selected gear appears briefly in
the instrument cluster, followed by the current
gear.
To use the automatic function again, move the
selector-lever to the right into position D.

Deactivating selector lever interlock
If the selector lever is blocked in the position P
even though the button on the selector lever is
pressed, the selector lever interlock can be
deactivated:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever.

63
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

R Reverse

When the selector-lever is briefly moved forward or back, the manual mode is activated and
the Steptronic shifts gear. The instrument cluster shows M1 through M6.

Communications Entertainment

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.

Mobility

P Park

Reference

An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts
into selector-lever positions R and P. To cancel
the interlock, press the button on the front of
the selector-lever knob, refer to arrow.

Move the selector-lever from position D to the
left into shifting slot M/S:
The Sport program is activated and DS appears
in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving
style. It is engaged automatically when the
Dynamic Driving Control is activated, refer to
Dynamic Driving Control.

Driving tips

Controls

To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<

Driving

The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating system
> Press the SPORT button again or
> shift into reverse or
> switch off the engine.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
toolkit, refer to page 197, press the lever at
the point marked in red and move the selector lever into the desired position.

Dynamic Driving Control
The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible
for your BMW to react in an even more performance-oriented manner at the push of a button:
> The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator pedal movements.
> Cruise control:
The stored speed is reached more quickly
when requested.

The LED in the button and SPORT in the instrument cluster go out.

Acceleration assistant with SMG
The acceleration assistant enables optimized
vehicle acceleration at race car level on road
surfaces with good adhesion when starting off.
Do not use the acceleration assistant too
often; otherwise, components will wear
prematurely.<
1. Activate the Dynamic Driving Control.
2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 87.
3. Press the accelerator pedal down fully:
Kick-down. The ideal starting-off engine
speed is set.
To maintain the vehicle stability, reactivate DSC afterward.<

Additionally with SMG:
> Gearshifts are faster.
> The engine speed range is used optimally in
the Drive mode.

Turn signals/
headlamp flasher

With automatic transmission:
> The Sport program is activated.

Activating system

High beams

Headlamp flasher

Turn signals

With the ignition switched on, press the SPORT
button.

64
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Wiper system

Move the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, only press the lever as
far as the resistance point.

Brief signaling
1

Switching on wipers

Triple turn signal activation

Switching off wipers or brief wipe

Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signals flash three times.

Activating/deactivating rain sensor

Cleaning windshield and headlamps

You can activate or deactivate this function.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

Switching on wipers
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Standard wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermittent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wipe
Briefly press twice or press beyond the resistance point.
The system reverts to operation at normal
speed whenever the vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor
Wiper operation is controlled automatically as a
function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is
located on the windshield, directly in front of the
interior rearview mirror.

65
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

5. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and
press the controller.
Triple turn signal is activated.

Navigation

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there as long as you wish to signal.

Driving tips

Controls

Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal
lamp.<

Communications Entertainment

Using turn signals

Driving

Activating rain sensor

Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks and
open flames, and store it in tightly closed containers well out of the reach of children. Always
follow the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<

Washer fluid reservoir
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the knurled wheel 5.

Deactivating rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are also cleaned at regular
and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washers when the washer fluid reservoir is
empty, as this will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<

Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you set
using the lever mounted on the steering column.
Do not use the cruise control under driving conditions that do not permit a constant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<

66
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Resuming stored speed

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating

Interrupting cruise control

Deactivating system

Resuming stored speed

When the ignition is switched off, the system is
deactivated and the stored speed is deleted.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
accelerating

Press button 4:
The vehicle accelerates to and maintains the
stored speed.

Displays in instrument cluster

Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The system maintains and stores the current
vehicle speed. The display 1 in the speedometer, see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you briefly press the lever, the vehicle speed increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point:
The speed increases by 5 mph/10 km/h.
The vehicle may accelerate beyond the regulated speed on steep downhill stretches where
the engine's braking action alone may not be
sufficient to slow the vehicle. Speed can drop
on uphill grades if the engine output is insufficient.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1, only the vehicle
speed is reduced.

Stored desired speed

Selected desired speed appears briefly

Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance setting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is technologically
advanced over the familiar cruise control and is
a welcome relief from the constant adjustment
of speed that can accompany driving in traffic
on freeways or other high-speed thorough67

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

> when DSC comes on

Driving tips

> when you apply pressure to the brake pedal
> when you depress the clutch pedal or shift
the automatic transmission/SMG into position N

Navigation

Cruise control is also interrupted automatically:

Communications Entertainment

Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.

Mobility

Interrupting cruise control

Reference

One lever for all functions

Driving

fares. Especially on longer trips, the system can
reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing
your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely
and responsibly.
In addition to maintaining a steady cruising
speed, active cruise control will, within the
scope of given possibilities, adjust your vehicle's speed automatically if you encounter
slower vehicles ahead, thus allowing you to flow
with the traffic without having to make frequent
interventions. For example, if, while cruising at
the selected speed, you begin to approach a
slower vehicle ahead of you in the same lane,
the system will reduce your vehicle's speed to
the same as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected distance setting between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. You can
vary the distance, which is also speed-dependent. Based on your selected distance setting,
the system automatically decreases the throttle
setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically
illuminate to signal a following driver to take
action. In addition, it may be necessary for the
vehicle or the driver to downshift, depending on
the kind of transmission your vehicle is
equipped with, to maintain the distance setting
selected. If the vehicle ahead speeds up or
when the lane ahead becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected by increasing the throttle setting and
shifting gears automatically or with the aid of
the driver as needed. Your selected speed will
be maintained when driving downhill, too.
Active cruise control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
Since this active cruise control system is
a new technology and operates differently from conventional cruise control systems
which you may be accustomed to, you are
strongly urged to read all of the pages relating
to this system before use. Pay special attention
to the information contained in the Things to
know about active cruise control section beginning on page 71.<

Professional* navigation system
If there is a navigation DVD in the player, refer to
page 120, then the system adapts the acceleration and deceleration behavior of the vehicle to
the road on which you are currently driving.
The influence exerted by the navigation system
is canceled when the vehicle position is
unknown, e.g. when it has left the mapped
region.

Manual transmission
You can shift gears with the cruise control activated. If you drive for extended periods at very
high or very low engine speeds, then a shifting
command is issued or the system is deactivated.

SMG
If you drive for extended periods at very high
engine speeds in Sequential mode, then a shifting command is issued or the system is deactivated.
In the Drive mode, the SMG acts similarly to an
automatic transmission in the D position.

Operating active cruise control

Store and increase desired speed

Store and decrease desired speed

Deactivate system, refer to page 70

Resume stored desired speed and distance, refer to page 70

Select following distance to vehicle ahead,
refer to page 69

68
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Briefly pull the lever repeatedly up to the resistance point or past the resistance point,
arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument cluster.
The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades
if the engine output is insufficient. If the
engine's braking action is not sufficient on a
downhill grade, the system lightly brakes the
vehicle.

Setting desired speed

> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resistance point, the desired speed decreases
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.
The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on clear roads.

Select distance

Adjust your desired speed to the traffic
conditions and remain ready to brake at
all times; otherwise, there is a danger of accidents. The system is unable to compensate for
great differences between your speed and that
of the vehicle ahead, e.g. when quickly
approaching a truck or when another vehicle
swerves into your lane.<

Increasing in steps
Briefly press the lever repeatedly up to the
resistance point or past the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is displayed.

> Rotary switch downward:
Increase distance
> Rotary switch upward:
Decrease distance

At a glance
Controls

Decreasing without intermediate steps

Driving tips

Press the lever up to the resistance point or
past the resistance point, arrow 1, until the
desired speed is reached.
The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on clear roads.

Navigation

Increasing without intermediate steps

Briefly press lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.

Communications Entertainment

Maintaining current speed

> Each time the lever is briefly pressed up to
the resistance point, the desired speed
increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

The speed then displayed is stored and
reached on clear roads.
69
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

> Each time the lever is briefly pressed
beyond the resistance point, the desired
speed is increased by a maximum of 5 mph
or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of
110 mph or 180 km/h is reached.

Driving

The selected distance is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Distance 1

> when the system does not recognize any
objects for a longer time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or
guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered
with dirt, refer to page 71
> when the speed is reduced to below
20 mph/30 km/h due to a traffic situation

Distance 2

Distance 3
This distance is set when the
system is used for the first time
after starting the engine.
Distance 4

Use good judgment to select the appropriate following distance given road conditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.<

The system deactivates automatically
when the speed is set to below 20 mph/
30 km/h. A signal sounds and a message
appears in the Control Display. The active intervention of the driver is required, otherwise there
is the danger of an accident.<

Resume stored desired speed and
distance
Press button 4.
The displays appear in the instrument cluster.
When you switch off the ignition, the stored
desired speed is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

Deactivate system

Stored desired speed

Lights up yellow: vehicle driving ahead is
detected
Flashes red and a signal sounds: the system
cannot establish the distance, you must
apply the brakes

Press the lever up or down. The displays in the
instrument cluster disappear.
You also deactivate the system when you apply
the brakes, shift very slowly, or shift into neutral.
In addition, the system is deactivated automatically:

Flashes yellow: driving stability control systems intervene and the active cruise control
is deactivated

> when you activate the DTC Dynamic
Traction Control

Selected distance to vehicle driving ahead:
lights up as soon as the system is activated

> when you deactivate the DSC Dynamic
Stability Control

Selected desired speed appears briefly

70
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

If the display ACC --- mph/km/h briefly
appears in the instrument cluster, it might
be that conditions necessary for operation are
not currently being met. To call up Check Control messages, refer to page 79.<

Radar sensor

If the sensor is incorrectly aligned, the active
cruise control cannot be activated.

As with conventional cruise control systems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own
personal responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or

roads with sharp curves such as highway offramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
heavy rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you.<
Always remember that the range and ability of the system do have physical limitations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
71

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

Things to know about active cruise control

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

The display 2 flashes yellow.
Automatic intervention by ABS or
DSC. The active cruise control
intervenes by braking until you
actively take over.

Driving tips

Heavy rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair the
detection of vehicles ahead. If necessary, clean
the radar sensor under the front bumper. In
doing so, be especially careful when removing
layers of snow and ice.

Reference

The display 2 flashes red and a signal sounds.
The system is warning you to intervene by braking or executing an
evasive maneuver. The active
cruise control cannot automatically restore the
distance to the vehicle driving ahead.
This display does not, however, relieve the
driver of the responsibility for adapting desired
speed and driving style to traffic conditions.

Controls

Warning lamps

Driving

your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead
of you, as for example at a traffic light or when
approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system
does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians
or other types of potential traffic such as a rider
on horseback. It is also possible that the system
may not detect smaller moving objects such as
motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert
when encountering any of these situations as
the system will neither automatically brake, nor
provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that
every decrease in the distance setting allows
your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front
of you and requires a heightened amount of
alertness.<
If your vehicle is actively following a vehicle in
front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or
the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway offramp.<

Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however, the
driver must constantly monitor traffic and intervene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off, too,
and any settings you have selected are canceled.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, active cruise control will not recognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.

Behavior in curves

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
Active cruise control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. If the system reduces vehicle speed below 20 mph/
30 km/h or if DSC/ABS is engaged while driving,
the system will automatically deactivate.
Remember, the system cannot stop your
vehicle. In addition, the system is deactivated whenever the driver applies the vehicle
brakes, shifts into neutral, or deactivates DSC.
After any deactivation, the system will no longer
automatically activate the vehicle brakes, which
means the driver must intervene and resume
manual braking. You should then reactivate the
system only when you are fully aware of the
prior speed and distance settings.<

Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and valleys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be recognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

72
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceleration by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driver interventions

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Anytime the driver presses down on the
accelerator pedal, any automatic braking
action by the system is interrupted until the
pedal is fully released. After doing this, release
the accelerator and the system again controls
your cruising speed and distance setting. While
driving with the system activated, resting your
foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the system not to brake even if necessary. Be certain
that floormats or other objects on the vehicle
floor do not interfere with movement of the
accelerator pedal.<

73
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the system to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or when
a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at
close range.<

Everything under control

Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock

Time, outside temperature, and date

Odometer and trip odometer

Press button:

Tachometer

> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> with the ignition switched off, briefly
display time, outside temperature, and
odometer
With the ignition switch at radio readiness or
higher the outside temperature and the time are
displayed.
To request the date:
Press the CHECK button on the turn signal
lever, refer to page 79.
To set time and date, refer to page 82.
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 83.

Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+3 6, a signal
sounds and a message appears. There is an
increased danger of ice.
Ice can form even at temperatures above
+377/+3 6. Drive carefully, especially
on bridges and shaded roadways; otherwise,
your risk of accident increases.<

The white-striped advance warning field,
arrow 1, changes depending on the engine
temperature. The segments disappear in
sequence as the engine warms to its normal
operating temperature.
Avoid allowing the engine speed to rise as far as
the advance warning field whenever possible.
It is absolutely crucial to avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field, arrow 2.
In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to
protect the engine.

Coolant temperature
Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 193.

74
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Computer

During normal operation, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 1607/70 6 and
approx. 3407/1706.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

To display the information, press the BC button
in the turn signal lever with the ignition switch at
radio readiness or higher.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:

Driving tips

Controls

Displays in instrument cluster

At a glance

Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the estimated remaining range available with the remaining fuel. The range is projected based on the driving style over the last
20 miles/30 km.
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 gallons/
70 liters. You can find information on refueling
on page 182.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
for example when you are driving in mountainous areas, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message appears for a short time on the Control Display; the remaining range is shown in the
onboard computer. Below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km, the message remains on the
Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
remaining range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

Refuel as soon as possible once your
remaining range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
off are not included in the calculations of average speed.
To reset the average speed: press the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
You can use the Control Display to view your
fuel consumption rate over two different dis-

75
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

Remaining range

Mobility

> Average fuel consumption

Reference

> Average speed

Navigation

> Remaining range

Everything under control

tances, refer to Displays on Control Display or
Trip computer.
To reset the average fuel consumption: press
the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx.
2 seconds.

Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for
principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
In vehicles without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

> Distance to destination:
> Entering a distance manually in the computer, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system*, refer to page 121.
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption

Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm.

Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance
to your destination. If necessary, hold it
against a slight resistance to enter a greater
difference.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically predetermined
during the destination guidance of the navigation system*.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:

Trip computer

> Entering a distance manually in the computer, see below.

The trip computer is suitable for a vacation trip,
for example.

> Entering a destination in the navigation
system*, refer to page 121.

1. Open start menu.

> Remaining range

2. Open "Navigation".
In vehicles without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

76
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

3. Press the controller.

> Departure time

Service requirements

> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting
all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.

Display options
You can display the computer or the trip computer in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
the assistance window and press the controller.

The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
Your BMW Service Advisor can determine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<

Additional information
You can view more detailed information by
using the Control Display, principle details, refer
to page 16.
1. Open start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.

Navigation

> Distance traveled

Communications Entertainment

> Driving time

Driving tips

Controls

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the controller.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

> "Onboard info"
> "Trip computer".

77
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

2. Select a menu item:

Everything under control

4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or an official
inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.

Entering dates for state emission and
vehicle inspections*
5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 83; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based
Service is not ensured.
1. Open start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated official inspections.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.
6. Select "Emission inspect." or "State
inspection" and press the controller.

You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.

7. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
8. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

78
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

11. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

At a glance

10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

message has been hidden after a short time.
The combinations of warning lamps and text
messages are stored and can be viewed later,
also refer to page 80.

Explanatory text messages
Controls

9. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.

Check Control

Navigation

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps displayed.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors, both in the display area 1 and in the display 2

You can display supplementary information
regarding most Check Control messages, e.g.
as to the cause of a malfunction and corresponding actions to be taken, see below.
In cases of corresponding urgency, this information is immediately displayed when the
associated lamps light up.
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a malfunction in the monitored systems. A Check
Control message of this kind includes indicator
or warning lamps in the instrument cluster, possibly an acoustic signal, and text messages at
the bottom of the Control Display.

Driving tips

The concept

79
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

This symbol means that a Check Control
message has been generated. The symbol
remains visible even if the Check Control

Important Check Control messages are
retained until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be deleted. If a number of
these malfunctions occur simultaneously, they
are displayed in succession.

Mobility

Importance of Check Control
messages

Everything under control

Less important messages disappear after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain in memory.

4. Select "Check Control messages" and
press the controller.

To hide these Check Control messages:
Press the CHECK button on the turn signal
lever.

5. Select a message and press the controller.

Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.

To exit from the menu immediately:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying the urgency of malfunctions

2. Press the button:
A new message appears each time you
press the button.

Displaying supplementary information
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Depending on the equipment, the stored Check
Control messages are also displayed with the
following symbols:
No malfunctions detected in the monitored systems.
Malfunctions detected in the monitored
systems. Depending on the malfunction,
supplementary information is shown on
the Control Display.
The symbols also indicate the status of the service requirements display, refer to page 77.

80
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> turns off automatically after a brief period
> can be turned off at any time by pressing
the CHECK button again for approx. 2 seconds

Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system applies your current
speed as the limit.

Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
The limit is automatically switched on.

Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached
this speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle has fallen at least
3 mph/5 km/h below it in the meantime.

Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

At a glance
Controls

The display:

7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically switched on.

Driving tips

Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several messages are present, you can press the CHECK
button repeatedly.

6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If necessary, hold it against a slight resistance to
enter a greater difference.

Stopwatch
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Open start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
In vehicles without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the controller.

1. Open start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
In vehicles without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

Navigation

Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.

5. Select the speed value and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Displays after completion of trip

> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
81
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

Mobility

Starting, stopping, or resetting

Everything under control

Taking an intermediate time reading

Setting time

Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.

1. Move the controller once to the front if necessary to change to the first field from the
top.

All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues to operate
in the background.<

Settings on Control Display
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button once or twice until
the start menu appears.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

2. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"
is selected and press the controller.

Making settings
1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The changed time is stored.

82
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Brightness of Control Display

You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.

The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the base setting.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.

At a glance

Activating hour signal*

1. Select "Brightness" and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting date
2. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Units of measure

1. Select "Units" and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is highlighted.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.

Changing date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

2. Select the menu item to be set.
3. Press the controller.
4. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

83
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

2. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first section of the date display is highlighted, in this case the month

You can change the units of measure for fuel
consumption, distances, temperature and
pressure.

Reference

1. Select "Date" and press the controller.

Navigation

2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.

Communications Entertainment

1. Select "Time format" and press the controller.

Driving tips

Controls

Setting time format

Everything under control

Language on Control Display
1. Select "Languages" and press the controller.

2. Select "Text language" and press the controller. You can select a different language
for the text displays.
3. Select the desired language and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

84
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

PDC Park Distance Control*

At a glance

Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
Switching off manually

With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system starts to operate automatically
approx. 1 second after you shift into reverse.
Wait this short period before driving.

Switching on manually

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall

Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system checked.
As a preventive measure, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure washers for prolonged intervals and always keep the
nozzle at least 4 in/10 cm from the sensors.

PDC with visual warning*
Press the button; the LED lights up.

You can also enjoy the option of having the system show the approach to an object on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are already shown there before a signal tone
sounds.
85

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips
Navigation

An intermittent signal indicates the distance of
the vehicle from an object being approached.
Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the
vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from
the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance
between vehicle and object decreases, the
intervals between the tones become shorter.
The signal tone becomes continuous once the
distance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm.

Communications Entertainment

Automatically activating

Signal tones

Mobility

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate the
presence of objects when they are being
approached slowly, as is usually the case when
parking. Avoid approaching an object at high
speed; otherwise, the physical circumstances
could cause the system warning to be activated
too late.<

After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.

Reference

The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
But an acoustic warning first sounds at approx.
24 in/60 cm for the sensors at the front and two
rear corners and at approx. 5 ft/1,50 m for the
center rear sensors.

Controls

Press the button again; the LED goes out.

The concept

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents the wheels from locking during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during hard braking. This increases active
driving safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. For information on safe braking, refer to
page 115.

5. Select "PDC display on" and press the controller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstacles always remains with
the driver. Even when sensors are involved,
there is a blind spot in which objects cannot be
detected. This applies especially in those cases
where the system approaches the physical constraints of ultrasonic measurement, as occurs
with tow bars and trailer couplings, and in the
vicinity of thin or wedge-shaped objects. Low
objects already displayed, e.g. a curb, can disappear from the detection area of the sensors
again before a continuous tone sounds. Higher,
protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be
detected. Loud noises from outside and inside
the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the
PDC signal tone.<

CBC Cornering Brake Control
This system provides further enhancements to
vehicle stability and steering response when
braking while cornering or when braking during
a lane change.

Electronic brake-force distribution
This system controls the brake system's application pressure at the rear wheels to ensure
stable deceleration.

DBC Dynamic Brake Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal for
the duration of the braking maneuver. DBC is
switched off when the brake pedal is released.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. DSC also
detects unstable driving conditions such as
fishtailing or sliding of the vehicle's front
wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle
safely stay on course within the physical limits
by reducing the engine output and by applying
the brakes differently in the individual wheels.

86
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Deactivating DSC

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or
on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or when
starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains*

A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.

Press the button; the DTC indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.

Deactivating DTC

To support enhanced operating stability, reactivate DSC again as soon as possible.

Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.

Activating DSC

For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.

For better control

The indicator lamp comes on:
DTC is activated.

The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp comes on:
DSC is deactivated.

Mobility

Press the button; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.

Communications Entertainment

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up, but not for
longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic
Traction Control and DSC are deactivated
together. Interventions promoting stability and
forward momentum will no longer be carried
out. The stability-promoting intervention of the
active steering* is also deactivated, refer to
page 90.

Navigation

Activating DTC

At a glance

DTC is a variant of DSC for special road conditions, e.g. uncleared snow-covered roads, that
is optimized for forward momentum. The system ensures maximum forward momentum, but
with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive
with appropriate caution.

Controls

The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Do not reduce the additional safety margin of the system by taking risks.<

Driving tips

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

87
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

The DSC is operational every time you start the
engine.

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Dynamic Drive*

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept

Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and optimizes vehicle stability during cornering and
evasive maneuvers.

The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the inflation pressures in the tires as you drive. The system provides an alert whenever the inflation
pressure drops significantly in relation to the
pressure in another tire.

Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on
the front and rear axles. Suspension compliance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying
from performance-oriented during cornering to
smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle
is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle
operation, the system continuously runs
through closed-loop control cycles lasting only
fractions of a second.
The system assumes operational status each
time you start the engine.

Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Display. There is a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
If a malfunction occurs, please remember
to adapt your speed accordingly, especially in curves.
The suspension will be noticeably softer and
the vehicle will display a greater tendency to tilt
during cornering and in crosswinds.
If a message stating that you should stop is
shown on the Control Display, stop at a suitable
location and switch off the engine as soon as
possible. In this case the oil level in the reservoir
may have dropped below the minimum, possibly owing to a leak in the hydraulic system. Do
not continue driving, but instead contact your
BMW center.<

In the event of a pressure loss, the rolling radius
and therefore the rotation speed of the wheels
change. This change is detected and signaled
as a flat tire.

Functional requirement
To ensure the reliable signaling of a flat tire, the
system must be initialized at the correct tire
inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
every correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snow-covered or slippery roads
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains*

Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is automatically continued.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains*.<
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

88
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on run-flat
tires, based on the following guide values:
5. Start engine, but do not start driving.
6. Select "Set tire pressure" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

> With low load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km.
> With medium load:
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km.
> With full load:
4 persons, luggage compartment full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km.

The initialization is completed during driving.
Then the message "Status: FTM active"
appears on the Control Display again.

Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up in red. A
message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.

At a glance
Mobility

8. Start driving.
The message "Initializing..." is displayed.

Drive reservedly and do not exceed
a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the
event of pressure loss, vehicle handling
changes. This includes reduced tracking
stability in braking, extended braking distances and altered natural steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur
while the vehicle is being driven, this can
indicate final failure of the damaged tire.
Reduce speed and stop at a suitable location as soon as possible; otherwise, pieces
of the tire could become detached and
cause an accident. Do not continue driving,
but instead contact your BMW center.<

Controls

2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.

Driving tips

4. Select "FTM" and press the controller.

Navigation

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

Communications Entertainment

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer
equipped with run-flat tires, as it was
when it came from the factory, refer to
page 188. Continued driving after a flat tire
can result in serious accidents.<

1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to
below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed
a vehicle speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
89
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Active steering*
The concept
The active steering is a system that actively varies the steering angle of the front wheels in relation to the steering wheel movements.
At low speeds, e.g. in a town or when parking,
the steering angle of the wheels is increased,
i.e. the steering becomes very direct.
In the higher speed range, on the other hand,
the steering angle is reduced more and more.
This improves the handling capability of your
BMW over the entire speed range.

The active steering is no longer operational. At
low speed, larger steering wheel movements
are required, while the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the
higher road speed range. The stability-promoting intervention can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the
system checked.

Brake force display

In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stability-promoting intervention is deactivated when DSC is
switched off, refer to page 86.

Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up and a message appears on the Control Display.

> Left-hand picture: normal braking.
> Right-hand picture: heavy braking.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:

Side airbags

Knee airbag

Front airbags

Knee airbag

Coupe: head airbags

90
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention
system from the vehicle. Do not modify or
tamper with either the wiring or the individual
components in the airbag system.This category
includes the upholstery in the center of the
steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the
side trim panels on the doors and on the Coupe,
the roof pillars along with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the
steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of airbag generators carried out only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with appropriately trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service
the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag activation, either of
which could result in personal injury.<

Before transporting a child in the front
passenger seat, read the safety information and follow the instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 56.
The front, knee and side airbag on the front passenger side can be deactivated for teenagers
and adults in certain seat positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up when this occurs. In these cases, change the
seat position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes
out. If the desired status cannot be produced by
changing the seat position, transport the corresponding person in the rear seat.
Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding,
beaded mats or other items onto the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place objects under
the seat which could press against the seat
from below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of
the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<

Controls
Driving tips

The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags below.<

Navigation

For details on the correct seat position, refer to
page 47.

The occupation of the seat is detected by evaluating the impression on the occupied seat surface of the front passenger seat. The system
correspondingly activates or deactivates the
front, knee and side airbag on the front passenger side.

Communications Entertainment

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags

Mobility

The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of a side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The
head airbag supports the head. The knee airbag
protects the legs from colliding with the cockpit.

Warnings and information on the airbags are
also provided on the sun visors.

91
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
please follow the adjustment instructions on
page 47.<

At a glance

Protective action

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Operating state of front passenger
airbags

The illustration here shows a possible arrangement in the Coupe. With some vehicle equipment packages or in the Convertible, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating status of the front,
knee and side airbag on the front passenger
side depending on whether the seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the
front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbag on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front, knee and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
But the front, knee and side airbag on the
front passenger side are still deactivated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

With the ignition lock at radio readiness or
higher, refer to page 58, the warning lamp lights
up briefly, indicating the operational readiness
of the entire airbag system and the safety belt
tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up as of radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immediately in case of a malfunction; otherwise,
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of an accident or a critical
driving situation, extreme inclination on the longitudinal or transverse axis, or loss of ground
contact. The rollover bars located behind the
rear head restraints are deployed within fractions of a second.
As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated
into the windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that all vehicle occupants
have the necessary headroom.
Always keep the path of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In less severe accidents, you are protected by
the fastened safety belt and, depending on the
severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and
the multistage airbag restraint system.<

92
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

The concept
With the Head-Up Display, important information is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
absorb this information without looking away
from the road.

2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway
down from above.
4. Press the rollover protection unit down until
it snaps into place.

Have the rollover protection system checked
after unexpected triggering.
Never move the convertible top when the
rollover protection system is raised.
No changes of any nature may be made to the
individual components of the rollover protection system and wiring.
Work on the rollover protection system may
only be performed at a BMW center.
Unprofessional attempts to service the system
can lead to failure or malfunction.

Switching on/off
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on:
Press the button to activate or deactivate this
system.

Mobility

5. Use the same procedure for the second rollover protection unit.

At a glance
Navigation

3. Let go of the release.

Controls

Head-Up Display*

Driving tips

1. Press the release backward and hold in that
position.

Communications Entertainment

If the rollover protection system experienced no
impact after automatic activation, then it can be
lowered again. No tools are necessary for this
purpose.

For a system check and to ensure long-term
functioning, you must comply with the maintenance intervals of the service requirements,
refer to page 77.<

93
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Lowering

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

Adjusting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
1

Navigation instructions

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

Display

3. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.

> Cruise control
> Active cruise control
3

Speed

4. Select "Brightness" and press the controller.

Selecting displays
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Head-Up Display" and press the
controller.
5. Select desired information of Head-Up
Display.

5. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to select "Head-Up Display".
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up
Display is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions
6. Press the controller.
The information appears on the HeadUp Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up
Display
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the base
setting checked at a BMW center.

94
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Specialized windshield

Controls

The windshield is a part of the system. The
shape of the windshield complies with the
requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable
a precise display. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed.
Have the windshield replaced only by a BMW
center or a repair shop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel.

Care instructions

Navigation

Driving tips

You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

95
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

To avoid damaging the cover of the HeadUp Display, use only a soft, nonabrasive
cloth to clean it.<

Lamps

Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive
Head Light* and high-beam assistant*

Parking lamps

Low beams/daytime driving lamps*

Parking lamps
In the switch position 2, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking. For lighting on one
side for parking as an additional feature, refer to
page 97.
The parking lamps drain the battery.
Avoid using for longer periods; otherwise,
it may not be possible to start the engine.<

Low beams
The low beams light up in switch position 3 only
with the engine running. Otherwise the parking
lamps are lit.

Pathway lighting
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration via iDrive or deactivate
the function.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.

5. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
6. Turn the controller to select the corresponding duration.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

Daytime driving lamps*
If you wish, you can leave the light switch in
position 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if required as
described under Parking lamps.

Automatic headlamp control
In switch position 1, the low beams are automatically switched on or off depending on the
ambient light, e.g. in a tunnel, at dawn/dusk in
the rain or snow, and the Adaptive Head Light*
is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on.
The low beams remain on independent of
the ambient lighting conditions when you
switch on the fog lamps.
With the daytime driving lamps activated, the
low beams are always switched on whenever
the ignition is switched on.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system

96
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Head Light
In switch position 1, the Adaptive Head Light is
active and the automatic headlamp control is
switched on.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light is not active when driving in reverse
and points toward the passenger side when the
vehicle is stopped.

Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic headlamp control flashes. The Adaptive Head Light
is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.

High beams/
roadside parking lamps

High beams

Headlamp flasher

Roadside parking lamps

High-beam assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off again. A sensor on the front of
the interior rearview mirror controls the process. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. This reduces the strain on you
while at the same time providing you with the
best possible visibility. Of course, you can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on
and off in the accustomed manner.

Activating high-beam assistant
1. Turn the light switch to switch position 1,
refer to page 96.
2. Press the turn signal lever in the high beam
direction with the low beams switched on.

The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high-beam
assistant is activated. The assistant
automatically switches between high and low
beams, reacting to oncoming traffic and traffic

97
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Avoid using for longer periods; otherwise, it may not be possible to start the
engine.<

Driving tips

The concept

Navigation

After parking the vehicle, press the lever in the
desired direction 3, past the resistance point.

Communications Entertainment

Adaptive Head Light*

You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking. When using
this function, comply with national regulations:

Mobility

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*

Reference

cannot detect fog. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
under these conditions.<

Lamps

ahead and to well-lit areas such as towns and
cities.

> In tight curves, on steep hilltops or in
depressions, with cross traffic or partially
concealed oncoming traffic on the freeway

Manually switching between high and
low beams

> In poorly lit places and with highly reflective
signs

You can intervene at any time if you wish or the
situation requires.

> In the low speed range

> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you want to use the low
beams, simply switch to the low beams with
the turn signal lever. This also deactivates
the high-beam assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever in the high beam direction
again.
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you want to use the high
beams, switch to the high beams in the
accustomed manner. The system is deactivated in the process and you must switch to
the low beams manually.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever in the high beam direction
again.

> When the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, decals, etc. in the
area of the interior rearview mirror
> When the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the interior rearview mirror with a cloth moistened with a small
amount of glass cleaner.

Front fog lamps

> You use the headlamp flasher in the usual
way when the low beams are on.

System limits
The high-beam assistant cannot replace
personal decisions about the benefits of
using high beams. In situations that require
them, you should switch to the low beams manually to avoid a safety risk.<
In the following sample situations, the system
either does not function or functions only in a
limited way and a personal reaction may be
required:

The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when the fog
lamps are switched on.
The fog lamps are switched off whenever the
high beams are switched on.
If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

> Under extremely unfavorable weather conditions, such as heavy fog or precipitation
> To make out poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, people on horseback,
horse-drawn vehicles, train or ship traffic
close to the road and wild animals crossing
the road

98
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 minutes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 58.<

Controls

Instrument lighting

Driving tips

The lighting intensity can be adjusted with the
knurled wheel.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Interior lamps

Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting, courtesy lamps* and sill
panel lighting* is automatic.

Switching the interior lamps on and off
manually
Press button 1.
If you want the interior lamps to remain off continuously, maintain pressure on the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To revert to normal operation, briefly press the
button.

The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp:
You can turn them on and off using the buttons 2 located next to the lamps.

99
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Reading lamps

Climate

Climate
Automatic climate control

Airflow directed toward the windshield
and side windows

Air for the upper body area, refer to
Ventilation on page 103

10 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment

Air to footwell

11 Residual heat mode

Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment

12 AUTO program

Maximum cooling

Defrosting windows and removing
condensation

14 LED for parked car ventilation

Air volume, manual

Switching off automatic climate control

16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed

Switching cooling function on and off
manually

13 AUC automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated air mode
15 Rear window defroster

100
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

A congenial climate

The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air distribution to the
windshield and side windows, in
the direction of the upper body, and in the footwell, as well as the adjustment of the air volume.
It also adapts your instructions for the temperature to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program
To meet your individual needs, you can
increase or decrease the intensity of the automatic climate control.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open
"Climate".

The marked intensity of the automatic
program is switched on.

Convertible program
When the convertible top is opened, the convertible program can also be selected. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the convertible top open. In addition, the air supply is
increased as the speed increases.
If the convertible program has been selected,
it is automatically active every time the top is
opened.
The effect of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector
is installed.<

Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possible at any time of year, if necessary with the
maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to achieve the set temperature.<

101
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

AUTO program

4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.

Communications Entertainment

Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 29.

Mobility

The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.

Driving tips

Controls

The AUTO program offers the optimum air distribution and air volume for virtually all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature that
you find pleasant.

At a glance

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.

Reference

The current setting for air distribution is displayed on the Control Display.

Climate

Adapting temperature in upper body
region
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.
4. Select the field by moving the controller and
adjust the air distribution by turning the
controller.

Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensation from the windshield and front
side windows.

be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if
necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's side or front
passenger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the controller.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribution.

Driver's side:
1

Airflow directed toward the windshield
and side windows

Airflow for the upper body

Rear window defroster

Air to footwell

The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
certain amount of time.
Convertible: the rear window defroster is only
activated when the rear window is closed.

Front passenger side:

Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.

Manual air distribution
You can specify the air distribution.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Climate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the controller.
The driver's and front passenger side can

Airflow for the upper body

Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button raises and
lowers the air distribution settings on the
Control Display.<

Switching the cooling function on
and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as needed
according to the temperature setting. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over
briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. The passenger
compartment can only be cooled with the
engine running.

102
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

The automatic climate control changes over to
the lowest temperature and switches into the
recirculated-air mode. The maximum air quantity only flows out of the vents for the upper
body. It is therefore necessary for these vents to
be open for maximum cooling.

The function can be switched on when the following conditions are met:

AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode

> outside temperature below 777/256

> LED off: outside air flows into the vehicle
continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
responds by blocking the supply of outside
air when required.

With the ignition switch at radio readiness or
higher the interior temperature, the air volume
and the air distribution can be set.

Switching off automatic climate control
The air volume, the heater and the
cooling function are all switched
off.
You can restart the automatic climate control by pressing any of its buttons
except the REST button.

Ventilation

> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is shut
off continuously.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
it off while also increasing the air volume as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over a longer period of time, as the air quality
inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<

Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and
closing air vents

Levers for changing the airflow direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets; otherwise, they could be catapulted outwards and cause injuries.<

103
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

The LED lights up when the function is
switched on.

Driving tips

> sufficient battery voltage

Communications Entertainment

Press the button repeatedly to run through the
following control sequence:

> engine at operating temperature

Mobility

You can respond to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. In AUC mode, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.

> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine

At a glance

The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.

Controls

Residual heat

Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible from an outside
temperature above 32 7/0 6 and
with the engine running.

Reference

Maximum cooling

Climate

Ventilation for cooling

Switching on and off directly

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a standard part of your scheduled maintenance.
You can have more detailed information shown
on the Control Display, refer to page 77.

1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open
"Climate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.

Parked car ventilation
The parked car ventilation is switched on.

The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior temperatures.
It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between uses.

The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open
"Climate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the controller.

The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent
outlets must be open for the system to operate.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.

104
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked car
ventilation has switched on.

Controls

The parked car ventilation is only available for activation within the subsequent
24 hours. After that, the time must be reactivated.<

At a glance

5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

Navigation

Driving tips

6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is highlighted.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

Communications Entertainment

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next adjustment is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating timer

The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
105
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the controller.

Practical interior accessories

Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<

Programming

The concept
The integrated universal remote control
replaces up to three different hand-held transmitters for various items of radio-controlled
equipment such as door openers and house
alarm systems. The integrated universal remote
control registers and stores signals from the
original hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched
on, this programmed memory button 1 can be
used to operate the respective feature. The
LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the
signal.
If you sell your vehicle one day, delete the saved
programs beforehand for your own security,
refer to page 107.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<

Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.

Memory buttons

LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.
2. When using for the first time: Press both
outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes. all stored programs are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 2 in/5 cm to 8 in/20 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the particular
system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance.
5. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

106
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

You can operate the system when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.

Deleting stored programs
Press both outer buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds, maintaining pressure until the LED 2
starts to flash: all stored programs are deleted.
Programs cannot be deleted individually.

Opening

Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<

Press the button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come on.

Closing
Fold the cover up.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled equipment.

Rechargeable flashlight*

2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in Fixed-code
hand-held transmitters.

The flashlight is located on the left side of the
glove compartment.
The flashlight can remain there continuously.

Navigation

Driving tips

Glove compartment

Communications Entertainment

If the device can not be used after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
transmitters.<

At a glance

The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.

Controls

The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the
equipment to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
107
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

Practical interior accessories

Remove the flashlight from the socket when
needed.

Adjusting height

Be sure that the flashlight is switched off
when it is inserted into its socket. Failure
to comply with this precaution could lead to
overcharging and damage.<

Pull the right button:
Move the armrest upward or downward and
lock it in the desired position.

Center armrest

The center armrest can be set in two positions.

Storage compartments
Storage compartment behind center
armrest

A storage compartment is located in the armrest between the front seats. This compartment
is integrated into the central locking system and
can also be locked separately using the hotel
function, refer to page 33.
To open the cover:
Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be
folded upward.
Depending on the version, the storage compartment can be equipped with a corresponding cradle* for the telephone or mobile phone.

To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge.
The compartment contains the cup holder and
the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 33.

Other compartments and nets
Other compartments are provided in the doors
as well as in the front center console*.
Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats and in the passenger footwell*.
To prevent the risk of injury during an
accident, do not stow hard or sharpedged items in the nets.<

108
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Another storage space is located in the luggage
compartment in the right side panel. If you wish,
this is also suitable to store the onboard documentation.

Do not place glass containers in the cup
holders. This would increase the risk of
injury in the event of an accident.<
To fold down, press at the top edge.

Ashtray
Press the trim strip of the cover.

Emptying

Cup holders

Press the opened cover beyond the resistance
point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for
removal.

109
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

The compartment of the rear center console
contains a built-in cup holder and a removable
one.

Navigation

Opening

Communications Entertainment

When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Driving tips

The removable cup holder can be inserted into
the side of the center console.

Controls

Coupe: clothes hooks

Practical interior accessories

Cigarette lighter

Ski bag*
It permits safe and clean transport of up to two
pairs of standard skies or one snowboard.
You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/
2.10 m long.

Loading
1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical devices

2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats.
The zipper gives you easy access to stowed
items and facilitates drying of the ski bag.
3. Press the button in the luggage compartment.

Socket
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket by inserting plugs of different shapes or
sizes.

In front passenger footwell

4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic
holder to secure it to the rear panel.
To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Make sure to load only clean skis into the ski
bag. Wrap sharp edges so that no damage
occurs.

Access to the socket:
Fold open the cover.
110
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

Securing cargo

Driving tips

After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. To do so, tighten the retaining belt at the
buckle.

111
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could move around and endanger
occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.
To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at
the bottom into the strip and press the filler element back into place. Make sure that you do not
damage the rear seat upholstery.<

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in

Clutch

Moving parts need time to adjust to one
another. To ensure that your vehicle continues
to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the following section.

Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox
Do not use the acceleration assistant during the
break-in period, refer to page 64.

Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. It is therefore important to drive reservedly during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.

The function of the clutch is only at its optimized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if components mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.

General driving notes
Closing luggage compartment lid
Only drive with the luggage compartment
lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust
can penetrate into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances should make it absolutely necessary to operate the vehicle with the
luggage compartment lid open:
1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass
sunroof.
Convertible: with closed top, close all windows.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic
climate control to a high level, refer to
page 102.

Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury.<

114
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Minimum tire tread on page 187.

Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if
it is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, electrical systems and transmission may be damaged.<

Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indicate to
the driver that ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Using handbrake on inclines

Driving in wet conditions

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise
greater clutch wear will result.<

When driving on wet roads or in heavy rain, it is
a good idea to apply light pressure to the brake
pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions
to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox
Start off quickly on slopes. Do not hold
the vehicle on a hill by applying the throttle, but engage the handbrake instead. Otherwise overheating can occur in the transmission
region.<

Hills
To prevent overheating and thus reduced
efficiency of the brake system, downshift
to a gear in which only minimal brake applications are needed when descending long or
115

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Controls

The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, immediately start
quickly; otherwise, the starting assistant no
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds
and it begins to roll back.<

Driving tips

2. Release the footbrake and immediately
drive off quickly.

Navigation

When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.

Communications Entertainment

Hydroplaning

The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.

Mobility

BMW advises against using mobile communications devices, e.g. mobile phones,
inside the vehicle without a direct connection
to an external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle
electronics and mobile communications device
can interfere with one another. In addition, there
is no assurance that the radiation emitted during transmission will be conveyed out of the
vehicle interior.<

Starting assistant

Reference

Mobile communications devices in
vehicle

Things to remember when driving

steep downhill stretches. Even light but consistent pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
The braking action of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting in the manual mode
of the automatic transmission, possibly as far as
first gear, refer to page 63. This prevents an
excessive load on the brakes.
Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in
idle or with the engine switched off; otherwise, there will be no engine braking action or
power-assisted braking and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<

With comfort access and automatic
transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in the selector
lever position N. Also refer to page 37.

Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

Determining loading limit

Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.

When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control during operation, and then exits under
the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under
the vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car wash
To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle
from being damaged, always fold them in by
hand before entering an automatic car wash.

1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg, otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving conditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
200 lbs.:
800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.

116
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> Use the luggage net* or securing straps to
hold down small and lightweight luggage
and cargo.

The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.

Stowing cargo

> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
bulkhead behind the rear seats.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.

Always position and secure the load as
described above. If you do not, it can
endanger the passengers during braking or
evasive maneuvers.
When fastening lashings, use only the lashing
eyes, refer to illustration; otherwise, the lashings could come loose or you could damage the
vehicle.
Never exceed the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 210, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also put you in violation
of freeway safety laws.
You should never transport heavy or hard
objects unsecured in the passenger compartment, as they could fly around and pose a safety
hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt
braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Pad on bottom of luggage
compartment
You can use the pad as needed, for example to
transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is
washable and has an anti-skid effect.

117
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation

> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Communications Entertainment

> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the luggage compartment are
used to secure these heavy-duty cargo
straps, refer to arrows.

Mobility

Load

Driving tips

Controls

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

At a glance

Securing cargo

Reference

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Starting navigation system

Starting navigation system*
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.

Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navigation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at
your BMW center.

Display in the assistance
window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you switch to another application.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.

Inserting navigation DVD

2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up.
2. Wait several seconds for the system to scan
the data from the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is possible that it is jammed. A message appears on
the Control Display.

4. Press the controller.
The contents of the assistance window are continually updated as you drive.

120
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:

3. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

At a glance

Destination entry
> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 128
> Selecting home address, refer to page 130
After selecting your destination you can proceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 132.

Operating navigation system
Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always obey the traffic regulations and road signs in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. If you do not observe this precaution,
you may be in violation of the law, and can
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<

Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 131. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

121
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".

Navigation

> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 127

Communications Entertainment

> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 126

Driving tips

Controls

> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 124

Destination entry

3. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until "Enter
address" is selected and press the controller.

Entering destination via town/city
name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the first letter and press the controller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this letter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:

The system also assists you with the following
features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries are being retained
for your new destination.

Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
A list of available countries appears on the
display.

> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller.
> To delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller, holding it
down.
4. Enter additional letters if necessary.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> Enter blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the controller.

2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
In order to be able to start the destination guidance, at least the town/city of the destination or
its zip code must be entered.

5. Change to the third field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until the town or

122
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.

At a glance

city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in exactly the same
way as the destination town/city.

2. Input the zip code:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.

The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.

Entering a street without entering
destination

> To delete individual digits or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller.
> To delete all digits or letters:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller, holding it
down.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered destination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.

Mobility

3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding town/city of destination
is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.

123
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

> Enter blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the controller.

You can also enter a street without entering a
destination. In this case all streets of the
entered country are offered for selection. The
related town/city is displayed after the street
name.

Communications Entertainment

1. Select "Town / City" and press the controller.

Navigation

Driving tips

Entering town/city of destination via
zip code

Controls

Entering street and intersection

Destination entry

1. Change to upper field.
The arrow is selected.

Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry

2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the country appears and press the controller.

Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
If destination guidance is not to be started
immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press the
controller.
The destination is stored in the destination list,
refer to page 127.

3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.

Entering house number
1. Select "House number" and press the controller.
2. Enter the house number:
Select the individual digits and press the
controller.
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.
Only house numbers stored for the street
on the navigation DVD can be entered.

Entering destination via
voice*
In conjunction with the Professional navigation
system, you can enter the desired destination
via the voice input system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
speech input and iDrive at any time. Reactivate
the speech input function for this purpose if
necessary.
With {Options} you can have the system
read aloud the possible commands.<
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
2. {Enter address}

124
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
destination. The more letters you say,
the more exactly the system recognizes
the town/city.
The system can suggest up to 20 destinations that match your entries. Up to
6 entries are displayed at once on the Control Display.

Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Destination guidance starts immediately.

Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be stored in the address book.
{Add to destination list} or
{add to address book}

Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of the destination, then it is possible to
input the destination by using a map. You can
use the cursor to limit the destination in the map
and then apply it into the destination guidance.

2. Selecting location:
Select {Yes}
or
Other town/city:
{No}
Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
The following options are available:
{Next page}: additional entries of the
list are displayed.
{Repeat}: the town/city can be
respelled.

2. Press the controller.

Mobility

A destination is suggested by the system.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.

Controls

Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.

Driving tips

To enter the destination, spell it using the customary spelling of the destination country.
Say the letters smoothly and at normal volume,
avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

Say the house number.

Navigation

Entering destination

To enter the house number:

Communications Entertainment

Say the country of destination in the language
of the voice command system.

The street is entered in the same way as the
destination.

At a glance

Entering street and house number

Say country of destination.

You can also select the town/city from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.

125
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Selecting country

Destination entry

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
>

Exit the menu.

A section of a map is displayed on the Control Display:
> During destination guidance, centered
around the current destination
> With the destination guidance deactivated, centered around the last destination entered

7. Press the controller.
The map for destination input can also be called
up from the map view:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using
information

4. Turn the controller to change the scale.
Move the controller in the desired direction
to move the map.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward, backward and also diagonally.
5. Press the controller to accept or store the
destination in the destination guidance system.
The selected town/city of destination and
other menu items are displayed.

You can display selected destinations for
towns/cities, select them and adopt them into
the destination guidance if necessary, e.g.
hotels, places of interest or hospitals.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Information" and press the controller.

6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the current position in the center of the map.

126
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

5. Press the controller.
6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and restaurants", and press the controller.
Destinations are shown on the Control Display which are sorted by distance or alphabetically.
The destination last entered appears at the top
of the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destination.
To display other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn the controller.

7. Select a destination and press the controller.
8. Select a menu item:
> To adopt the address into the destination list and start the destination guidance:
Select "Select as destination" and press
the controller.

At a glance
Driving tips

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

Adopting the destination into the
destination guidance system
1. Select the desired destination from the destination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

Mobility

> To establish a telephone connection:
Select "Call" and press the controller.

Navigation

> "On a new destination"

The last 20 destinations entered into the destination list are displayed. You can select these
destinations and adopt them into the destination guidance system.
For example, in order to plan a longer route, you
can store all of the destinations you wish to visit
in the destination list ahead of time, refer to
Entering a destination manually on page 121.

Communications Entertainment

> "On location"

To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

127
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

> "On destination"

Controls

Destination list

4. Select location:

Destination entry

Editing the destination list

Storing destinations in address book

1. Select the desired destination from the destination list and press the controller.

You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.

> To store the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> To display information on the destination:
Select "Information on destination".

2. Select "New address" and press the controller.

> To delete the entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". Destination guidance is switched off.
> To change the entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination via town/city name,
page 122.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the controller.

3. Press the controller.

4. Enter names and addresses.

Address book

5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.

Opening address book
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

You can also store a destination from the destination list in the address book, refer to
page 127.

Storing current position*
The current position can be adopted into the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.

128
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

3. Select "Edit address" and press the controller.

4. Change the entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 121.

Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Delete address" and press the controller.

To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the
controller.

129
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Navigation

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
The stored entries are displayed on the
Control Display.

Driving tips

Selecting destinations from address
book

Controls

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

You can also enter your current position in the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.

1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Mobility

4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.

Changing destinations from address
book

Reference

3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 121.

Destination entry

4. Select "Delete data" and press the controller.

To change the entry:
1. Select "Home address" and press the controller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the controller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 121.

Selecting route
5. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
6. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Storing home address
You can store your current position or the current destination as a home address in the
address book. This entry is in the second position in the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.

You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like when
entering the destination and whenever the destination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules,
taking the road type into account, e.g. whether
it involves freeways or winding roads. The road
types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a
result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal experience.

Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the destination guidance, and press the controller.
To select the home address as the destination:
1. Select "Home address" and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

130
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> "Short route"
Short route, regardless of how fast or
slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.

> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions, provided that the
spelling of the entry corresponds to a standard form used in another country.
Example:
Instead of 'Munich", you can also enter the
German spelling 'München' or the Italian
spelling 'Monaco'.
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets, the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.

The route criterion is highlighted.
5. If necessary, select an additional route criterion and then press the controller:

> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
nonexistent names and addresses.

> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

131
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance
Reference

Mobility

The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map display:
Select the respective symbol and press the
controller.

Controls

> "Fast route"
The fast route, being a combination of
the shortest possible route and the fastest roads

The system supports the word matching principle to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored on the navigation
DVD as the basis for instant response. The user
benefits include:

Driving tips

> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible.

Word matching principle

Navigation

> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.

Communications Entertainment

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

Destination guidance

Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.

Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In the arrow display or map view
Select the

symbol and press the controller.

2. Turn the controller until the destination is
selected from the destination list and press
the controller or enter a new destination,
refer to page 121.

In the destination list
This symbol marks the current destination.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the controller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map display on the Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map display:
Select the
symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment via iDrive at any time. You are
notified well in advance of a necessary change
of direction by spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrows.

If the destination was not reached before the
end of the last trip, upon restarting you will see

132
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Distance to the next change of direction

To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Current position

Direction of travel
> Hollow arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route.

Route display

> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a multilevel parking lot.

You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Comfort opening of menu items on
page 18.<

Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is displayed.

Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destination are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change of direction, the appearance of
the arrow changes.

Street name for change of direction

Distance to change of direction

Change of direction

To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

At a glance

Arrow to destination as the crow flies

Controls

The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.

Driving tips

Starting/stopping destination guidance

Navigation

Communications Entertainment

the question:
"Continue guidance to destination?".

Switching voice instructions on/off

Selecting route criteria

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

133
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.

Mobility

Displaying map display

Destination guidance

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"

To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 300 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north, toward your current direction
of travel, or show the map in perspective. At
scales of 300 miles/500 km or greater, the map
always points toward north.

Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map view is displayed.

Changing scale
3. Press the controller.

Turn the controller to change the scale.

Displaying towns/cities and streets of
the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual road are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
1

Switching voice instructions on/off

Starting/stopping destination guidance

Selecting destination using map

Showing/hiding information last selected,
refer to Selecting destination using information on page 126

Changing map view
>
>
>

2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.

"Map facing north"
"Map direction of travel"
"Perspective"

Changing route criteria

Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.

To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

134
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Switching voice instructions on/off

2. In the arrow and map display:
Turn the controller until the
symbol is
selected and press the controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use*.

Repeating and canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 54:
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
1. Open start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Display settings"
is selected and press the controller.

> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.

Setting volume of voice instructions
The volume can only be adjusted during a voice
instruction.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if required.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.

135
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.

> To repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.

Navigation

1. In the map view:
Move the controller to the left to change the
field.

Driving tips

Controls

Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map view:

At a glance

5. Turn the controller until "Navigation voice
instructions on" is selected and press the
controller.

Communications Entertainment

Destination guidance
through voice instructions

Destination guidance

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Displaying current position

Bypassing route sections

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.

You can also display your current position with
the destination guidance switched off.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position displayed on a map, refer to page 133.

136
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery has just been reconnected
after having been disconnected, it then
takes up to 10 minutes before the system is
once again operational.

At a glance
Communications Entertainment

> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.

Controls

> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise display?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your current position is not
yet available on your navigation DVD, or the
system is in the process of calculating your
current position. As a rule, reception is
guaranteed in the open air.

> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersections?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.

Driving tips

> a navigation DVD is inserted, but the
request to insert the DVD is displayed on
the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the right
DVD for the navigation system. The DVD is
labeled accordingly.

> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station etc., then start
the destination guidance.

Mobility

> you want to enter a destination for the destination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any letters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.

137
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

What to do if …

Navigation

What to do if …

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Entertainment
This chapter describes the operation
of the radio and CD player as well as
their tone settings.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

On/off and tone

On/off and tone
The following audio sources have shared
controls and setting options:

Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

> Radio Professional* or
Radio Business

> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on, the last set radio
station or CD track is played.

> CD player

> Turn: adjust volume.

> CD changer*

2
3
4

Controls

Station scan/track search
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.

> Buttons near CD player
5

> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

Eject CD
> Change radio station.

The audio sources can be operated using:
> iDrive

Drive for audio CDs

Drive for navigation DVDs

Operation via iDrive

Buttons near CD player

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

The layout of the buttons can vary depending
on your vehicle's equipment.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Equipment with a single drive:

2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".

Equipment with two drives:
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
> "CD": CD player or CD changer
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control,
sample stations.

140
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

Controls

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.

Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output
on/off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

Navigation

For equipment with an individual drive, the
sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes
with the ignition switched off.
To do so, switch the sound output on again.

Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The sound settings are globally adjusted for all
audio sources.

At a glance

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Driving tips

The selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use.

Changing tone settings

The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.

Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items on
page 18.<

141
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

On/off and tone

2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.

Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

2. Turn controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "LOGIC7" and press the controller.

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control automatically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the controller.

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To switch off spatial sound:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.

142
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges:

Driving tips

Controls

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.

Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

143
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

5. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

Radio

Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.

Changing stations

Listening to radio

Turn the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.

Professional radio*

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

You can choose from the following selection
criteria:

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.

> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 146.

Radio Business
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:

4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g.
"Presets".

> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest signal, refer
to page 145.
> "Presets":
Stations you have stored, refer to page 146.

If "Autostore" does not display any stations or
if the stations displayed can no longer be
received, to update the station with the strongest signal, refer to page 145.

144
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

1. Press the controller.

2. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is selected and press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels the scan search, and the radio
remains on the current station.

Buttons next to CD player
To start scan, hold down the
the corresponding direction.

button for

To stop scan, press the button again.

Selecting the frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that are
received in addition to those displayed.

2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

Sampling stations, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current waveband.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain frequency.

Updating stations with best reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.

Navigation

Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next displayed station.
You can also change stations with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Buttons next to CD player

At a glance

1. Change into the second field from the top.

Controls

To stop the scan:

Driving tips

Changing selection criteria

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Mobility

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.

145
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

Scan starts.

Radio

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.

3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.

Storing stations
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected
and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.

"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired memory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.

2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is selected and press the controller.

The stations of the last selection criterion are
displayed again after a short time.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
146
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.

At a glance

Changing a memory position

3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Controls

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.

RDS Radio Data System
RDS transmits additional information in the FM
frequency range. If the reception conditions are
good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

The most frequently used stations are
shown at the beginning.

Navigation

1. Select "All stations" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.

Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every for to six minutes
and are routinely updated at intervals of one to
three hours, and more often when necessary.
Most stations operate 24 hours a day.

147
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.

For the "All stations" selection criterion, you
can set whether the most frequently used stations are displayed at the beginning.

Reference

5. Turn the controller until the desired memory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.

Communications Entertainment

Automatically sorting
stations*

Driving tips

RDS is activated.

Radio

In case of a storm, the National Weather Service interrupts the routine weather news and
transmits special warning messages instead.
If you have a question about NOAA Weather
Radio, please contact the nearest office of the
National Weather Service. Details are also provided on the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press
the controller.

Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

4. Select "HD radio" and press the controller.

2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.

High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and in improved sound quality.

5. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is activated.
This symbol is displayed when a sender is
being received digitally.

Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the

menu.
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog signals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
playback switches between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.

148
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the controller.

At a glance

With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select station and press controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

Controls

If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.

Displaying additional information

The information is displayed.

Driving tips

Updating stations offering digital
reception

2. Change into the second field from the top.

Satellite radio*
You can receive up to 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to
2 minutes.
149
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

" and press the con-

Mobility

5. Select "Autostore
troller.

If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interruption.

Reference

4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

Navigation

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

Radio

Enabling or disabling channels

Disabling

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is displayed.

4. Press the controller.

The electronic serial number is
required to disable.<
3. To have the channels disabled:
Dial phone number.

Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.

Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required to enable or disable.<
2. To enable the channels:
Dial phone number.

Channels are shown on the Control Display
sorted on the basis of selection criteria.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.

150
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

At a glance

7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Controls

> "Categories":
All channels sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.

3. Press the controller.

Select a channel marked with this symbol.

Track

Storing channel
1. Select desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

"Presets" is displayed.

151
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

Artist

Reference

The channels of this category are displayed.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.

The name of the channel and additional information on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.

Driving tips

Additional information

Radio

4. Turn the controller to select a memory position and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The stations of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.

Changing channel with buttons next to
CD player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled channel.

Notes
If no signal can be received for more than
4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Control Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<

152
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

CD player: starting CD

Equipment with two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.

4. On vehicles with a CD changer, change to
the second field from the top and turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
The CD player is started.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the
data depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".

Playback starts automatically if the sound output is switched on.
To eject the CD, press the button on the
CD player.
The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

CD changer: starting CD

Driving tips

Controls

The CD player is capable of playing CDs with
compressed audio files, i.e. MP3.

Navigation

Compressed audio files*

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Listening to CDs

At a glance

CD player and CD changer*

3. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
4. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "CD" is selected and press
the controller.
153
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

2. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

Mobility

1. Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to
page 157.

CD player and CD changer

5. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until the
desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press
the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.

Compressed audio files*
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD magazine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.

Selecting a track

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Buttons next to CD player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly, continuing until you reach
the desired track on the current CD.
The CD will start to play at the start of the track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.

To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.

154
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Displaying information on track*

At a glance

To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.

Controls

With compressed audio files, you can display
possibly included information about the current
track, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

This cancels the scan search and the player
remains on the current track.

Compressed audio files*
The information about the current track is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.

1. Select the current track and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

To end scan search:

Navigation

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

1. Press the controller.

Driving tips

To stop the scan:

This cancels the scan search and the player
remains on the current track.

155
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Reference

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.

Mobility

1. Press the controller.

CD player and CD changer

Repeating track
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.

To cancel repeat mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.

Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To cancel random mode:
The current track on the CD is repeated.

1. Press the controller.

To cancel repeat mode:

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select the current track and press the controller.

1. Select the current track and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.
> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
To cancel random mode:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.

156
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Buttons next to CD player:
Press and hold the
sponding direction.

To insert:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.

button for the corre-

Controls

CD magazine

At a glance

Fast forward/reverse

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.

To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:

To remove:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the corresponding CD.

Inserting/removing CDs into/from
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them only by their edges, taking care to
avoid touching the reflective CD memory surface.

Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
inserted CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs with adhesive
labels as these can come loose during playback
due to heat build-up and cause irreparable
damage to the system.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no
longer be ejected.
157

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.

Reference

Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Inserting CD magazine

Driving tips

Removing the CD magazine

CD player and CD changer

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<

General malfunctions

Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.

Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or advanced age of the CD/DVD blank.
Label CDs/DVDs only on the top, using a marker
designed for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints dust, scratches, and moisture.
Keep CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1207/50 6, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection
Manufacturers often provide CDs/DVDs with
copy protection. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.

158
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

159

Reference

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate
your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control
and how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Telephoning

Telephoning*
The concept

For your safety

Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After a suitable mobile
phone has been logged onto the vehicle once,
you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive,
with the buttons on the steering wheel and by
voice.

A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate owner's manual for a detailed
description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular
attention to the following:

A mobile phone that has been logged on once is
automatically detected again as soon as it is
brought back inside the vehicle, provided that
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on. The logon data of up to four mobile phones
can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected simultaneously, the most
recently logged-on mobile phone can be operated via the vehicle.

Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the handsfree system instead. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<

Suitable mobile phones
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the external antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW center which mobile phones will fit in the snap-in
adapters they offer.
BMW discourages the use of mobile
phones or other mobile communications
devices inside the vehicle without a direct connection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
device can interfere with each other. In addition,
there is no assurance that the radiation that
results from transmission will be dissipated
from the vehicle interior.<
A mobile phone detected by the vehicle should
not be operated by the mobile phone's keypad;
otherwise malfunctions may occur.

Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones will fit in the snap-in adapters
they offer. These mobile phones support the
functions described in this Owner's Manual,
provided they are running a certain software
version. Malfunctions can occur with other
mobile phones.

Care instructions
You can find what you need to know about caring for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone operating instructions.

Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> The steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands, refer to page 170

162
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Preparation with iDrive

You can use the car phone via the handsfree
system for BMW Assist calls.

1. Press the
menu.

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
button to open the start

At a glance

Making calls with car phone:
BMW Assist calls

Navigation

The following prerequisites must be met:
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to
page 165, and the mobile phone are active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, presets in
the mobile phone are required: e.g. activated via the menu item Bluetooth or the
menu item Connection not with confirmation.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

> To log on, specify any desired number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required following successful logon.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only log on the mobile phone with the
vehicle stopped; otherwise you may
become distracted and inadvertently endanger
your passengers and other road users.<

Switching on ignition

Preparation with mobile phone

1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.

6. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, connect or link under Bluetooth device.

2. Switch on the switch on ignition by pressing
the Start/Stop button without depressing
the brake or clutch pedal.

Driving tips

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

163
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

Logging on mobile phone on vehicle

3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.

Mobility

Initial operation

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.

Reference

It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a connection is being established to BMW Assist
or while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.

Controls

When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communication", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

Telephoning

Logging on
Depending on your mobile phone, first, the display of your mobile phone and then the Control
Display will ask you to enter the Bluetooth passkey you specified.
Display on the Control Display if the Bluetooth
passkey can be entered with iDrive:
7. Select "Add device" and press the controller.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transferred to your vehicle, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone if necessary.
This transfer depends on your mobile phone,
refer to the operating instructions of your
mobile phone if necessary, and can take several
minutes.
Up to four mobile phones can be logged on
consecutively. If you log on a fifth mobile phone,
the logon data of the last mobile phone in the
list will be deleted, refer to below.

List of logged-on mobile phones

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.

All mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the logon data can be displayed. If several logged-on mobile phones are detected by
the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be operated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
menu.

button to open the start

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
9. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
10. Wait a few seconds until the list of the
logged-on mobile phones is shown on the
Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.

To cancel the logon of the mobile phone on the
vehicle:
Select "Refuse connection" and press the controller.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a maximum of two minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
164
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
menu.

button to open the start

2. Open the menu by pressing the controller.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily disconnect the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.<

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
the mobile phone can use other devices with a
Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance
If you no longer want to operate your mobile
phone via the vehicle, you can delete the logon
data of the mobile phone.

1. Remove the mobile phone from the snap-in
adapter and switch it off.
2. Press the
menu.

button to open the start

3. Select the menu and press the controller.
4. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.

Mobility

Logging mobile phone off vehicle

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

7. Select "Delete device" and press the controller.
The logged-off mobile phone is deleted
from the list.
The phone book entries you have transferred from your mobile phone to your vehicle are also deleted in the process.

Reference

7. Select "Move device up" and press the controller.
The selected mobile phone is move upward
by one position.

Telephoning

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Dial the phone number.
> Dial phone numbers from the phone book.
> Select stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls.
> Hang up.

6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
the Bluetooth link is activated.
7. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deactivate the link.

With the ignition and radio readiness switched
off, e.g. after removing the remote control, you
can continue an ongoing call for a maximum of
25 minutes via the handsfree system.

Requirements
The logon data of the mobile phone are stored
in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to
operate.
The engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the

button.

Adjusting volume

This opens the start menu.
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the handsfree system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

2. Move the controller forward to open
"Communication".

Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Select "Accept" and press the controller.

Ending a call

Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.

At a glance
Controls

4. Select "Dial number" and press the controller.

1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.

Driving tips

Accepting a call

Calling

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the controller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete an incorrect character:
Move the controller to the right to select
and press the controller.

Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.

Mobility

2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Reference

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Dialing phone numbers

Telephoning

Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.

4. Select the desired entry and press the controller.

> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automatically stored in the Top 8 list. The list is
sorted according to frequency.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.

Dialing phone numbers from phone
book
The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the controller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the controller.

Dialing phone numbers stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.

At a glance

Touch tone dialing
The touch tone code is required for access to
network services or for controlling devices, e.g.
remote checking of an answering machine.

Controls

3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.

Driving tips

3. Select the desired entry and press the controller.

1. Establish connection.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.

Deleting individual entries
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired character and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending the mobile
phone model.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

This function is available when a connection
has been established.

1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.

Reference

Mobility

Deleting the entire list

Telephoning

Changing between mobile
phone and handsfree system
From mobile phone to handsfree
system
You can continue calls begun outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree system when the motor is running or the ignition is
switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,
the system automatically switches over to the
handsfree mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the handsfree mode:
> You may also be able to continue the conversation via the handsfree system,
depending on the mobile phone used.
Follow the instructions displayed on the
mobile phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.
> Press the
button above the storage
compartment. Switching over may take
several seconds.

From handsfree system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the handsfree system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Follow the instructions displayed
on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.

Symbols in Owner's Manual
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

Voice commands
Activating system
1. Press the
button on the steering wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
The text or numbers that the voice command system has registered will appear on
the Control Display.

Ending/canceling operation by voice
Press the
or

button on the steering wheel

{Cancel}.
In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command,
e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the
button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the system read aloud the possible commands at any point:
{Help}.

Using alternative commands

Operation by voice*
The concept

There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{Dial name} or {Name}.

You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
assisted by announcements and questions in
many cases.

The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 166.

At a glance

Response

e.g. {123 456 7890}

{Dial}

Adjusting volume

Correcting phone number

You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:

After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.

Deleting input
{Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered
so far.
Turn the button during an instruction to select
the desired volume.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. {Dial number}.
The dialog for establishing a telephone
connection is opened.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.

Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a personal voice phone book.
> On vehicles with separate drives for audio
CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries are
automatically adopted from your mobile
phone's memory.
> On vehicles with a shared drive for audio
CDs and navigation DVDs, the entries must
be entered by voice and are independent of
your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it
is not possible to use voice command either
to call phone numbers stored in the mobile
phone or to store new numbers.

Mobility

3. {Dial}.
The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Controls

Command

{Dial number}

Driving tips

button on the steering wheel.

Reference

Press the

Navigation

Start the dialog:

Communications Entertainment

Example: dialing phone numbers

Telephoning

Creating and editing voice phone
book*
Save entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
1. {Save name}.
The dialog for storing a name is
opened.
2. Speak name and repeat entry upon
request.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number when prompted.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.

Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

Redialing
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".

Notes
The commands in English were available
as of this printing. Other languages are
currently not available. To operate the mobile
phone via the voice command system, refer to
page 22.<

Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
Have entries read aloud and select:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged with the
ignition switch at radio readiness or higher or
with the steering unlocked.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<

Removing mobile phone
Press button.

Reference

Mobility

To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press the area 1 around the button.

At a glance
Driving tips

2. With the keys facing upward, press the
mobile phone toward the electrical connections and press down until it engages.

Controls

1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.

Navigation

1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover.

Inserting mobile phone

Communications Entertainment

Mounting/removing snap-in
adapter

TeleService, BMW Assist

TeleService* , BMW Assist*
TeleService

Requirements

TeleService assists you when communicating
with a BMW center. The built-in car phone can
be used to transmit data regarding the service
status of your vehicle or regarding legally mandated inspections directly to your BMW center.
This is the same data that is also stored in the
remote control for CBS Condition Based Service. Your BMW center can then contact you,
and you can make a convenient appointment
while your BMW center can prepare in advance
for the required maintenance work. The TeleService functions are country-specific: the data
regarding the service status of your vehicle or
regarding legally mandated inspections is
transmitted on a country-specific basis either
automatically before they fall due or during your
calls to the BMW center. Your BMW center will
be glad to provide more detailed information.

You can use TeleService or BMW Assist when
the following requirements are met:
> The installed car phone is logged on to a
cellular telephone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
This can be displayed on the Control Display.
> For TeleService or BMW Assist to be activated and updated, the GPS signal must be
available.
> You have applied for BMW Assist through
your BMW center or BMW Customer Support.

Enabling TeleService or BMW Assist

BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with other services in
addition to TeleService. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transferred to
the BMW Assist response center if an emergency call* has been initiated.
Many functions of BMW Assist depend on the
individually agreed contract. Data transmission,
e.g. of the CBS Condition Based Service, differs from country to country.
The contract of participation with BMW Assist
and the activation must be completed before
you can use BMW Assist.
When the contract expires, the car phone can
be deactivated by a BMW center without your
having to visit a BMW center. Following deactivation of the car phone, no emergency calls can
be made. The car phone can be reactivated
after signing a new contract with a BMW center.

For you to be able to use the services of
TeleService or BMW Assist, these must be
enabled.

Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current location. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave radio readiness switched on while
connecting to the system.

Enabling
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.

You can also use the services of BMW Assist via
the Internet. The range of services is continually
being expanded.
174
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 159 709 © 09/05 BMW AG

5. Select "Service Status" and press the controller.

> The data transferred can be the vehicle
data, your current position or the data of the
CBS Condition Based Service.

Automatic service notification*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on legally mandated inspections is transmitted
automatically directly to your BMW center prior
to the due date. You can check when the BMW
center was notified.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the controller.
TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist
are enabled; data exchange with the service
center starts.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

5. Select "Service notification" and press the
controller.

At a glance
Mobility

Enabling takes a few minutes. The status is
displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the enable process continues to
run in the background.

Controls

> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.

Driving tips

> The services offered are country-specific.

Navigation

The following special features apply for the services of TeleService and BMW Assist:

Communications Entertainment

Services offered

Reference

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.

TeleService, BMW Assist

Breakdown assistance
You can call Roadside Assistance* of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".

Establishing contact with your BMW
center or BMW Customer Relations
You can contact your BMW center, e.g. to
arrange a service appointment.
For information related to your vehicle, call the
BMW Customer Relations.
This requires your mobile phone to be logged
onto the vehicle.
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

3. Select "BMW Assist" and press the controller.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service" and press the controller.
5. Select desired BMW service:
> "Service Request"
> "Customer Relations"

5. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.

6. Press the controller.
7. Select "Start service" and press the controller.
Contact with the desired BMW service will be
established.
If the current position can be determined,
the current vehicle location is displayed.
6. Select "Start service" and press the controller.
Contact with Roadside Assistance will be
established.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.

The automatic service notification can be disabled separately. Please contact your BMW
center for this purpose.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the controller.

Re-enable TeleService and, if applicable,
BMW Assist to log on again.

The current services available from
TeleService or BMW Assist are displayed.
6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the
controller.

At a glance

Displaying vehicle data
When TeleService or BMW Assist is activated,
the license plate and the vehicle identification
number of your vehicle can be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.

Controls

1. Open the start menu.

The use of TeleService or BMW Assist is
blocked, and the current vehicle position will
not be transferred during an emergency call*.
To deactivate the blocking function, enabling
must be carried out again, refer to page 174.
This does not affect the contractual agreements.

Driving tips

If the offering from TeleService or BMW Assist
changes, you will be notified. In this case you
should update the services.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.

5. Select "Profile" and press the controller.

Terminating services
If you block the services, the connection to
BMW Assist is deactivated.
1. Open the start menu.

Navigation

Displaying and updating services

6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the
controller.

Communications Entertainment

Adapting TeleService or
BMW Assist

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.

To adjust the license plate number, please contact your BMW center.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the controller.

Reference

3. Select "Communication settings" and
press the controller.

Mobility

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

TeleService, BMW Assist

BMW Contact*
If you are not activated for BMW Assist, you can
display several service phone numbers:
> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance
> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make
an appointment for service

5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.

> BMW Hotline*, for information on all
aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 175.
You can select the displayed service phone
number if your mobile phone is logged on in the
vehicle:
iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.
1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.

179

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
breakdown assistance.

Refueling

Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refueling; otherwise, no fuel can be dispensed
into the tank and a message is displayed.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel containers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause
an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Observe following when refueling
When handling fuels always follow any
safety guidelines posted at the gas station.<

Fuel filler door

Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting the filler nozzle
during refueling
> results in premature pump shutoff
To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of
the fuel filler door.

Manual release

> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuelvapor recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 US gallons/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
remaining range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
release the fuel filler door manually:
In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with
the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.

Fuel filler cap
Closing
Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is
a clearly audible click.
Do not jam the strap attached to the fuel
filler cap between the fuel filler cap and
the vehicle. A message is displayed if the cap is
loose or missing.<

At a glance

Fuel specifications
Never used leaded gasoline; it will permanently damage the catalytic converter.<

Required fuel
Controls

Premium unleaded gasoline
The minimum Octane Rating is 91.

Driving tips

If you use gasoline with this minimum Octane
Rating, the engine may produce knocking
sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum Octane Rating corresponds to the
Anti Knock Index AKI and is determined according to the so-called (R+M)/2 method.

Use high-quality brands

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Field experience has demonstrated significant
differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for
sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels
containing up to and including 10% ethanol or
other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by
weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will
not void the applicable warranties with respect
to defects in materials or workmanship.

Reference

Mobility

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
problems relating to drivability and starting, and to a tendency to stall, especially under
certain environmental conditions such as high
ambient temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems,
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality
brand.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressures for driving
up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Information for your safety

For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column for traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.

The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving comfort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution, you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.<
After correcting the inflation pressure(s),
always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 88.<

Pressure specifications

These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.

The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may result.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph/160 km/h

The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list
of these is available from your BMW center.<

In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column
of the table on the following pages and adjust
your tire inflation pressures as needed.
Otherwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressure for your tires, observe the following:

Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.

The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.

> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

30/210

33/230

30/210

33/230

39/270

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 W

30/210

33/230

30/210

33/230

39/270

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 W

30/210

33/230

30/210

33/230

39/270

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W
Rear: 275/30 R 20 93 Y

30/210

33/230

30/210

33/230

39/270

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 210.

Tire inflation pressures for the 650i Convertible
Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
32/220

38/260

32/220

38/260

39/270

46/320

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W
Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 W

32/220

38/260

32/220

38/260

39/270

46/320

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W
Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 W

32/220

38/260

32/220

38/260

39/270

46/320

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W
Rear: 275/30 R 20 93 Y

32/220

39/270

32/220

38/260

39/270

46/320
Mobility

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S
245/50 R 17 99 H M+S

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 210.

Reference

Tire size

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S
245/50 R 17 99 H M+S

Driving tips

Controls

All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

At a glance

Tire inflation pressures for the 650i Coupe

Wheels and tires

Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.

Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 W

e.g.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt type
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating number
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter
before the R on ZR tires

Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C

Speed letter

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half, 1γ, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.

All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<

Tread wear

DOT code:

Traction

e.g.

DOT xxxx xxx 3305
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age

Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on
the sidewall:
DOT ... 3305 indicates that a tire was manufactured in week 33 of the year 2005.
BMW recommends replacing all tires at least
every 6 years, even if some tires may last for
10 years.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 188.

M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.

Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and foreign objects lodged in
the tread, and check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not fall below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm.
At tread depths below 0.12 in/3 mm, there is an
increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning,

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazards and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases reduce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires
inspected immediately. To do this, carefully
drive to the nearest BMW center or a specialized tire dealer that works in accordance with
BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained
personnel. Have the vehicle towed to the repair
shop if necessary. Tire damage can be
extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and
other road users.<

At a glance
Driving tips

Controls

Wheel/tire damage

Navigation

RSC – run-flat tires

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circumference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
is worn down to the wear indicators, then the
legally permissible tread depth limit of 0.063 in/
1.6 mm has been reached.

Communications Entertainment

The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<

Mobility

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

even when only small amounts of water are
present on the road surface.
Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for
winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm.
New tires should be mounted in the interest of
safety.

Reference

Temperature

Wheels and tires

Run-flat tires

approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe accidents.If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can find out the right wheel-tire combination from your BMW center.

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of self-contained tires and
special rims. The sidewall reinforcement
ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
For continued driving with damaged tires, refer
to Indication of a flat tire, page 89.

The right wheel-and-tire combination is
another vital factor in ensuring reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS
and DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. After a tire is
damaged, always remember to have the original
wheel and tire combination remounted on the
vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

New wheels and tires
Only have new wheels and tires mounted
by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. If this
work is performed inexpertly, there is a danger
of damage and associated safety risks. Make
sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend the use of
retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety
may be reduced. Potentially substantial variations in the design and the age of the carcasses
can result in a reduced service life.<

The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the

BMW recommends particular tire brands for
each tire size. You can recognize these from the
clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling characteristics.

Run-flat tires
When installing new tires or when changing
from summer tires to winter tires, for your own
safety, use run-flat tires. No spare wheel is provided in the event of a flat. Your BMW center will
be glad to advise you.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that you do not have damaged run-flat
tires repaired; they should be replaced.<

At a glance

Special characteristics of winter tires

Controls

BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.

Watch speed

Driving tips

Always observe the maximum permissible speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in accidents.<

Storage

Navigation

Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall
of the tire.

Snow chains*

Communications Entertainment

BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more information.
These snow chains are approved exclusively for
use in pairs on the rear wheels with the tire size:
> 245/50 R 17 Y
> 245/45 R 18 Y
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions
when installing snow chains. Do not exceed a
vehicle speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with the
chains installed.

Reference

Mobility

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
installing snow chains as this could cause
the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction.
When you are driving with snow chains, it can
be beneficial to switch off DTC briefly, refer to
page 87.<

Under the hood

Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you are unfamiliar with the specifications to be
observed, only have work carried out on your
vehicle by a BMW center or a repair shop that
works in accordance with BMW guidelines and
uses appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise there is a danger of damage and associated safety risks if this work is performed
improperly.<

Closing

Close the hood with momentum, releasing it
from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm. It must be
clearly heard to engage.

Hood

Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while you are driving your vehicle,
you should stop at once and close it securely.<

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath the
microfilter cover, refer to page 193

Jump-starting terminal, refer to page 203

At a glance
4

Washer fluid reservoir of the headlamp and
windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 66

Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 193

Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving
style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.

1. Press the
button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Mobility

The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level on the Control Display while driving or when stopped on a level
surface with the engine running.

Communications Entertainment

Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Topping off
engine oil

iDrive, for principle details, refer to page 16.

Reference

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Engine compartment

Under the hood

4. Select "Service requirements" and press
the controller.

5. Select "Engine oil level" and press the controller. The oil level is displayed.

Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measured value available: Updating
engine oil level measurement...":
Engine oil level is being measured. This
process can take approx. 3 minutes when
stopped on a level surface and approx.
5 minutes while driving.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
engine oil.":
Add 1 quart/liter of engine oil at the next
opportunity.
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Please observe recalculated service interval for engine oil":
Do not add engine oil. Continued driving is
possible. To do this, observe the recalculated remaining mileage until the next oil
change service, refer to page 195. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.

Topping off engine oil

Do not add 1 quart/1 liter of oil until a corresponding message appears on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise engine damage could result.<
Continuous contact with used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory tests.
For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas
of skin with soap and water after such work.
Keep oil, grease, etc. out of reach of children
and heed warnings on containers. Failure to do
so could pose health risks.<

Oil change
Have oil changes carried out only by a BMW
center or a repair shop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel.

Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Use only approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes. Use
only oils of the specification API SH or higher.
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<

Approved oils belong to the SAE grades
5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.

Coolant
Do not open the cooling system when the
engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause
burns.<
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard.<
Always observe all applicable environmental laws and regulations when disposing of used coolant additives.<

1. The engine must be at ambient temperature.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when it lies
between the Min and Max mark, also refer to
the drawing next the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until it clicks.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Brake system
Malfunction
Brake fluid
The warning lamp lights up in red
in spite of the handbrake being
released; a message appears on the
Control Display.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to
below the minimum level. At the same time, a
significantly longer brake pedal path may be
noticeable. Have the system checked immediately by a BMW center.
Warning lamp for Canadian models.

At a glance
Controls

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.

Driving tips

The viscosity is a measure of the thickness of
the oil and is specified in SAE grades.

Navigation

Viscosity grades

Communications Entertainment

Do not use oil additives; under some
circumstances, they can harm your
engine.<

Mobility

Checking coolant level

Reference

You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Under the hood

When you continue driving, an increased
brake pedal path can be necessary, and
significantly longer braking distances may be
required. Please adapt your driving style
accordingly.<

Brake pads
The warning lamp lights up in red
in spite of the handbrake being
released; a message appears on the
Control Display.
The brake pads have reached their minimum
pad thickness. Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
Warning lamp for Canadian models.

For your own safety: use only brake pads
that BMW has approved for your particular vehicle model. As BMW cannot assess the
suitability of other brake pads for use on your
vehicle, BMW is unable to assume continued
responsibility for the vehicle's operating safety
if non-approved pads are installed.<

At a glance

Maintenance
> Spark plugs

Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, you will find that a complete dealer
service history is an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 77:
> Engine oil

Make sure the date in the iDrive is always
set correctly, refer to page 83; otherwise,
the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service requirements.
Have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance, and may also be
required when submitting warranty claims.<

> Brakes, front and rear separately

Driving tips

The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.

Your vehicle stores this information continuously in the remote control while the vehicle is
being driven. After accessing the data stored in
the remote control, your BMW Service Advisor
can suggest precisely the right array of service
procedures for your own individual vehicle.
For this reason, when you take your vehicle in
for service, you should give the BMW Service
Advisor the remote control last used to drive it.

Navigation

Service data in remote control

Communications Entertainment

> Legally required tests depending on local
regulations

Controls

> Vehicle check

Mobility

The BMW Maintenance
System

Reference

> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

Maintenance

Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface

Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a
device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also subscribed to a BMW Assist plan, then certain vehicle data can be transmitted or recorded to
enable corresponding services.

Care
A diagnostics device can use the OBD socket to
check components critical to exhaust composition.

Important information on care and maintenance
of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your
vehicle brochure.

This socket is located under a cover on the left
side of the driver's footwell, directly under the
dashboard.

Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up. The
exhaust-gas values are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction on Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce speed and drive to
the nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage
to the emission-relevant components, especially the catalytic converter, within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system can detect the
escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to
light up. If the cap is then tightened, the display
should go out within a few days.<

Wiper blade replacement

When performing maintenance on the headlamps, follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
In the case of bulbs whose replacement
is not described, please consult your
BMW center.<

Xenon lamps

1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp it firmly.
2. Press the locking tabs together while sliding the wiper blade toward the front to disengage it.
3. Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in
until it audibly clicks into place.

Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to driving safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the
specified procedures, have the corresponding
work carried out at your BMW center.

The service life of these lamps is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times. In the unlikely event that one
of these lamps should fail, you can continue
driving under poor visibility conditions by
switching on your fog lamps and proceeding
carefully, where allowed by law.
Have work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb changes, carried out only
by a BMW center. Due to the high voltage
involved, there is a danger to life and limb when
work is carried out improperly.<
For checking and adjusting headlamp
aim, please contact your BMW center.<

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor mat.

Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the electrical
devices involved to prevent short circuits from
occurring.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, follow any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.<

Navigation

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.

Communications Entertainment

Never touch the glass on new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<

Mobility

Onboard tool kit

Reference

Replacing components

High beams, parking lamps

Front turn signal, sidemarker
Your BMW is equipped with two turn signal
lamps per side in the front.

Turn signal lamp 1
Bulb 21 watts, WY 21 SV
The illustration shows the front right side of the
engine compartment.
1. Press the lever shown:
The illustration shows the front left side of the
engine compartment.

> downward for the right turn signal
> upward for the left turn signal

High beams
Bulb 55 watts, H 7
1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab
and removing the cover cap upward.
2. Press the bulb holder from above to release
it.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove and replace the bulb.
The lamp H7 is pressurized; wear eye
protection and protective gloves. Otherwise, there is the risk of bodily injury if the lamp
is damaged.<

Parking lamps

2. Remove the bulb holder towards the rear.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Turn signal lamp 2
Bulb 21 watts, WY 21 SV
The bulb for the turn signal lamp 2 can be
replaced via the wheel well.

Bulb 10 watts
Bulb holder and reflector are one unit and
are replaced together.<

The illustration shows the front left side of the
vehicle.

1. Turn the bulb holder 2 to the right and
remove.

1. Turn the steering all the way to be able to
remove the cover, refer to illustration.

2. Press the snap connection on the plug connector, pull off the bulb holder and replace.

2. Turn off the light, switch off the ignition and
remove the remote control from the ignition
lock.
3. Unscrew the two bolts using the open-end
wrench from the onboard tool kit, refer to
page 197.

The roadside parking, rear and brake
lamps are LEDs. The backup lamps are
equipped with long-life bulbs. Please contact a
BMW center in case of a malfunction.<

At a glance

Tail lamps

Controls

4. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove,
refer to arrow.

Sidemarker
1

Turn signals

The bulb can be replaced via a cover at the front
of the wheel well, refer to the description for
turn signal lamp 2.

Roadside parking, rear and brake lamp

Backup lamp

Reflector

Rear turn signals

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Side turn signals
Bulb 5 watts, WY 5 W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to the
rear, release the snap connection at the
front and take it off the trim strip.

Bulb 21 watts, PY 21 W
The illustration shows the recess on the left
side of the luggage compartment.
1. Remove the cover.
2. Unclip the bulb holder and remove.

Mobility

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

Communications Entertainment

1. The bulb holder of the sidemarker lamp is
located toward the outside of the vehicle
next to the bulb holder of turn signal lamp 2.

Navigation

Bulb 5 watts, WY5W ST

Driving tips

5. Remove and replace the bulb.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 90 5 and
remove.

Reference

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Replacing components

License plate lamps

case of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to
advise you.
Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 188.
The suitable tools for changing tires are
available as accessories from your BMW
center.<

Car jacking points

Bulb 5 watts, WY 5 W
1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the
lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and
remove.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 lightemitting diodes.

The jacking points for the car jack are located in
the positions shown.

Vehicle battery
Maintenance

Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

The battery is 100 % maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all
matters concerning the battery.

Changing a wheel

Charging battery

Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a
standard feature. An immediate wheel change
in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer
required.

Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. For the connections, refer
to Jump starting on page 203.

For continued driving with damaged tires, refer
to Indication of a flat tire, page 89.

Disposal

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires on page 188.
If you have new tires mounted or switch from
summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use runflat tires because no spare tire is provided in

After replacement, have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or deposit
them at a recycling center. Maintain the battery
in an upright position for transport and storage.
Always secure the battery to prevent it from tipping over during transport.<

Controls

> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The position must be stored again, refer to
page 49.
> Time and Date
The values must be updated, refer to
page 82.
> Radio
Stations must be stored again if necessary,
refer to page 146.
> Navigation system
Wait until the system starts, refer to
page 137.

At a glance

In luggage compartment

Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and
remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit.
Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional
fuses 2 are provided there.

Navigation

Fuses

Driving tips

Following a temporary interruption of the power
supply, the operation of some equipment is limited and must be reinitialized. Individual settings
are also lost and must be updated:

2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and
fold the lid 4 forward.

Communications Entertainment

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse, and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to overloading of the wiring, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
located in the compartment for the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 197.
Information on fuse allocation is located below
the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.

Mobility

In glove compartment

1. Press the button on the back in the center of
partition 1 and pull out the partition upward,
arrow 2.

Reference

Power failure

Giving and receiving assistance

Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency call
Conditions for an emergency call:
> Full mobile phone preparation package
> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 174.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The car phone is logged on to a cellular
telephone network.
> The emergency call system is operable.
When the contract for your BMW Assist plan
expires, a BMW center can deactivate the car
phone without your having to visit a workshop.
Following deactivation of the car phone, no
emergency calls can be made. The car phone
can be reactivated after signing a new contract
with a BMW center.

Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
With some vehicle equipment packages or
in the Convertible, the arrangement of the
switches and indicator lamps may differ
somewhat.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be forwarded to the
BMW Assist emergency call center.
If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear
the BMW Assist emergency call center through
the handsfree system, this could indicate, for
instance, that the handsfree system is no longer
operational. But the emergency call center is
still able to hear you.
Under certain conditions, an emergency call is
automatically initiated immediately after a
severe accident. The automatic emergency call
is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency call
cannot be guaranteed under the most
unfavorable conditions.<

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle can be found in the luggage compartment on the left side.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as
the voice connection to the BMW Assist
emergency call center has been established, the LED flashes.

2. Take out first-aid kit.

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparing

To refit the filler element, insert the two
bottom tabs into the strip and press the
filler element back into place. Make sure that
you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. For this reason, check
the expiration dates of each of the items regularly and replace any whose expiration dates
have passed.

1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Switch off all electrical accessories in both
vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of short circuiting.<

Connecting jumper cables

Roadside Assistance*
The Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group
offers you assistance in the event of a breakdown around the clock, including on weekends
and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the
BMW Contact directory.

To avoid personal injury from sparks,
follow this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW, the so-called auxiliary terminal
for jump starting in the engine compartment
serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also
refer to engine compartment overview on
page 191. The cover is marked with a +.

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips

When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.

Navigation

Jump starting

Communications Entertainment

1. Press the button downward and pull the
filler element forward.

Mobility

The first-aid kit is located in the filler element of
the rear seat backrest.

In the case of vehicles with BMW Assist or
TeleService, you can contact the Roadside
Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in
the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,
refer to page 176.

Reference

First-aid kit*

Giving and receiving assistance

1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jumpstarting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
jump-starting terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.

3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a jumpstarting terminal of the vehicle to be started.

Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<

4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the vehicle
providing assistance.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative terminal.

If required, have the battery inspected and
recharged at your BMW center.

Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<

Using tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit
mounted on the inside of the luggage compartment under the floor mat, refer to page 197, and
should always remain in the vehicle. It can be
screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.

Only use the tow fitting that comes with
the vehicle and screw it in as far as possible. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do
not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise
the tow fitting and vehicle can be damaged.<

Selector lever in position N.

Front

Do not exceed a towing speed of
45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<

SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox
Engage selector lever position N with the ignition switched on.

At a glance

Automatic transmission

Rectangular cover in bumper:
Press the arrow symbol on the cover.

Controls

Access to screw thread

In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted.
Familiarize yourself with the regulations on towing in the respective country.

Rear

Driving tips

Towing methods

Switch on the hazard warning flashers depending on the local regulations. If the electrical system fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be strictly limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<

With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach tow ropes to the tow fittings only, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<

Mobility

Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 58; otherwise, the low-beam
headlights, tail lights, turn signals and windshield wipers would not be available. If the vehicle electrical system fails, do not tow-start or
tow the vehicle. The electric steering-wheel
lock cannot be unlocked and the vehicle cannot
be steered. For information on jump starting,
refer to page 203. There is no power assistance
with the engine stopped. This then requires
increased effort for braking and steering. Active
steering is deactivated and larger steering
wheel movements are required.<

Reference

Being towed

The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please note the following:

Communications Entertainment

The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed; otherwise, it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<

Navigation

With tow bar

Giving and receiving assistance

With tow truck

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.<

Tow-starting
If the vehicle electrical system fails, do not
tow-start or tow the vehicle. The electric
steering-wheel lock cannot be unlocked and
the vehicle cannot be steered. Jump starting,
refer to page 203.<
Do not tow-start vehicles with an automatic transmission. Only tow-start vehicles with a catalytic converter when the engine
is cold. It is better to jump-start the engine, refer
to page 203.<
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.
3. Shift into 3rd gear, vehicles with SMG, see
below.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Vehicles with SMG Sequential Manual Gearbox:
1. Tow-start in selector-lever position N.
2. Select sequential mode. The correct gear
will be selected and engaged automatically.

207

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice command
system and the index, which is the quickest way
to find the information you are looking for.

Technical data

Technical data
Engine specifications
650i
Displacement

cu in/cmµ

292.8/4,799

No. of cylinders

Maximum output

at engine speed

rpm

Maximum torque

lb ft/Nm

at engine speed

rpm

360
6,300
360/488
3,400

Weights
650i Coupe

650i Convertible

Curb weight

lbs./kg

3,814/1,730

4,277/1,940

Approved gross vehicle weight

lbs./kg

4,652/2,110

5,049/2,290

Load

lbs./kg

838/380

772/350

Approved front axle load

lbs./kg

2,337/1,060

2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load

lbs./kg

2,491/1,130

2,778/1,260

Luggage compartment capacity

cu ft/l

15.9/450

10.6/300

> with raised convertible top compartment floor, refer to page 35

cu ft/l

–

12.4/350

Never exceed either the approved
axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

At a glance
211

Reference

Mobility

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Coupe: dimensions

Technical data

Convertible: dimensions

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank

gal/liters

approx. 18.5/70

including reserve of:

gal/liters

approx. 2.1/8

Window and headlamp
washer system

quarts/liters

approx. 5.3/5

Engine oil and filter change

quarts/liters

8.5/8.0

Fuel specification: page 183
For details: page 66
BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil
Oil grades: page 192

Function

Command

To open the assistance window 20

{Assistance window}

To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 134

{Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function

Command

To activate telephone 167

{Phone}

To dial phone number 167

{Dial number}

To display the phone book 167

{A to Z}

To dial from phone book 167

{Call ...} or
{Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 168

{Top 8}

To redial 168

{Redial}

To display "Received calls" 168

{Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 168

{Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 163

{Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist

{BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" 176

{BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 178

{BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 176

{BMW Contact numbers}

Mobility

174

Communications Entertainment

Communication

Navigation

Assistance window

Driving tips

Controls

item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice command system.

Reference

With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu

At a glance

Short commands of the voice command
system*

Short commands of the voice command system

Navigation
Function

Command

To select navigation 121

{Navigation}

To open "Enter address" 121

{Enter address}

To open "New destination" 121

{New destination}

To display "Input map" 125

{Input map}

To display destination list 127

{Destination list}

To display the address book 128

{Address book}

To display the route criteria 130

{Route preference}

To start destination guidance 132

{Start guidance}

To end destination guidance 132

{Stop guidance}

To display arrow display 133

{Arrow display}

To display map view 133

{Map},{Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}

To change scale 134

{Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}

To display streets and towns/cities of the
route 134

{Route list}

To switch on voice instructions 135

{Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 135

{Navigation info on}

To repeat voice instructions 135

{Repeat navigation info}

To open route 130, 134

{Route}

To display current position 136

{Current Position}

Onboard info
Function

Command

To open "Car Data" 76

{Car data}

To display the computer 76

{Onboard info}

To display the trip computer 76

{Trip computer}

To set the speed limit 81

{Limit}

To start the stopwatch 81

{Stopwatch}

At a glance

Entertainment
Command

{Audio}

To switch on radio 144

{Radio on},
{FM on} or
{AM on}

To open "FM" 144

{FM menu}

To open "AM" 144

{AM menu}

To open "All stations" 144

{FM All stations}

To select the radio station 144

{Station ...} or
{Choose station}

To open "Presets" 144

{FM presets} or
{AM presets}

To select stored radio station 144

{Choose preset}

To open "Manual" 145

{FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open the radio station with the best
reception 145

{AM Autostore}

{Weatherband on}
{Choose weatherband station}

To open "SAT" 150

{SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 150

{SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 151

{SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 150

{SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 150

{SAT radio categories}

To select CD player 153

{CD menu}

To switch on CD player 153

{CD}

To select CD changer 153

{CD-changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 153

{CD-changer}

To select a CD 153

{CD 1...6}

To select music track 154

{CD track ...}

To select CD and track 154

{CD 1...6 track ...}

Navigation
Mobility

To select a weatherband station 148

Reference

148

Communications Entertainment

{Weatherband menu}

To open "WB" 148
To switch on weatherband

Driving tips

Controls

Function

Tone control 141

Short commands of the voice command system

Climate
Function

Command

To open "Vent settings" 102

{Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 101

{Automatic programs}

To open "Parked car ventilation" 104

{Parked car operation}

To open "Automatic ventilation" 104

{Automatic ventilation}

To display the activation times 104

{Activation time}

menu
Function

Command

To open "Door locks" 30, 32

{Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons"

{Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 65, 96

{Lighting}

To open "Communication settings" 174

{Communication settings}

To open "BMW Service settings" 174

{BMW Service settings}

To open "BMW Service" 176

{BMW service}

To open "Service requirements" 77, 175

{Service requirements}

To open "Service" 77, 175

{Service}

To display "Check Control messages" 79

{Check Control messages}

To open "Display settings" 82

{Display settings}

To open "Head-Up Display" 94

{Head-up display}

To activate speed limit 81

{Limit on}

To deactivate speed limit 81

{Limit off}

To adjust the brightness of the Control
Display 83

{Brightness}

To open "Units" 83

{Units}

To open "Languages" 84, 135

{Language}

To open "Time" 82

{Time}

To open "Date" 83

{Date}

To open "PDC" 85

{PDC}

To open "FTM" 88

{FTM}

To open "Entertainment settings" 141

{Entertainment settings}

Driving tips
Navigation

ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 67
Acceleration assistant with
SMG 64
Accessories 6
Activated-charcoal filter 104
Activating hour signal 83
"Activation time" for parked
car ventilation 104
Active cruise control 67
– Indicator lamp 70
– radar sensor 71
– selecting distance 69
– warning lamps 71
Active steering 90
– warning lamp 90
Adapter for spare key 28
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 90
Adaptive Head Light 97
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 168
"Address book" for
navigation 128
Address for navigation
– deleting 129
– entering 121, 124
– selecting 129
– storing 128
– storing current position 128
"Add to address book" 128

"All doors" 30
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 189
"All stations" on the radio,
selecting 144, 147
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
"AM", reception
range 140, 144
Antenna for mobile phone 162
Antifreeze
– coolant 193
– washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System
ABS 86
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central locking system 29
Anti-trapping mechanism
– glass sunroof 40
– power windows 39
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 210
Approved engine oils 192
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 210
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 108
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 76
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 132
"Arrow display" during
Navigation 133
Ashtray 109
Assist, refer to
BMW Assist 174
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
Assistance window 20

Communications Entertainment

"Add to destination
list" 124, 125
Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 31
Adjusting the thigh support 48
Adjusting tone in audio mode,
refer to Tone control 141
"After opening door" 50
"After unlocking" 50
Airbags 90
– deactivating, refer to
Exception for front
passenger's seat 56
– sitting safely 47
– warning lamp 92
Air distribution
– automatic 101
– manual 102
Airing, refer to Ventilation 103
Air recirculation, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 103
"Air recirculation on / off" 54
Air vents, refer to
Ventilation 103
Air volume 102
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 183
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
– interior motion sensor 36
– switching off alarm 35
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 36
– tilt alarm sensor 36
All around the center
console 14
All around the steering
wheel 10
"All channels" 150

Mobility

"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.

Reference

Index

Controls

At a glance

Everything from A to Z

"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculatedair control 103
Audio 140
– controls 140
– switching on/off 140
– tone control 141
– volume 141
"Audio", refer to Tone
control 141
Automatic
– air distribution 101
– air volume 101
– headlamp control 96
– service notification 175
– steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 53
– storing stations 145
Automatically switching
between high beams and
low beams, refer to Highbeam assistant 97
Automatic car washes 116
– also refer to Comfort
access 37
– also refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Automatic climate control 100
– automatic air
distribution 101
– convertible program 101
– switching off 103
Automatic curb monitor 53
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 96
– refer to Daytime driving
lamps 96
– refer to High-beam
assistant 97
– refer to Interior lamps 99
– refer to Pathway lighting 96
"Automatic programs" 101
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 103
Automatic station search 145

Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 63
– Dynamic Driving Control 64
– interlock 62
– kick-down 63
– selector lever lock,
Interlock 62
– shiftlock 62
– towing 205
– tow-starting 206
– with comfort access 37
"Automatic ventilation" 104
AUTO program with
automatic climate
control 101
"Autostore" on the
radio 144, 146
Average fuel consumption 75
– setting units 83
Average speed 75
"Avoid ferries" for
navigation 131
Avoid freeways for
navigation 130
"Avoid highways" for
navigation 131
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
"Avoid tollroads" for
navigation 131
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 210
"A - Z" 168

B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 48
Backrests, refer to Seats 48
Backup lamps
– refer to Reverse gear 61
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 199
"Balance", refer to Tone
control 142

Balance, refer to Tone
control 142
Balance adjustment in audio
mode, right/left 142
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 203
Bass, refer to Tone
control 141
"Bass", tone control 142
Bass, tone control 141
Battery
– disposal 38
– jump starting 203
– refer to Vehicle battery 200
Battery change 38
Being towed 205
Belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 109
Blower, refer to Air
volume 102
"BMW Assist" 176
BMW Assist 174
– enabling 174
– services offered 175
"BMW Contact" 178
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 178
BMW homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 195
"BMW Service" 176
"BMW Service settings" 175
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 109
Brake Assistant, refer to DBC
Dynamic Brake Control 86
Brake fluid 193
– level 193
– warning lamp 193
Brake force display 90
Brake hydraulic system 193
Brake lamps
– brake force display 90
– replacing bulbs, refer to Tail
lamps 199

California law
– Event Data Recorders 196
California Proposition
65 Warning 6
"Call" 168

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 162
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 108
– refer to Mobile phone 162
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car radio, refer to Radio 144
Car wash 116
– refer to Before driving into a
car wash 116
– refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– with comfort access 37
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 114
"Categories" 151
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 86
CBS Condition Based
Service 195
"CD" 140, 153
CD changer 153
– controls 140
– fast forward/reverse 157
– installation location 157
– playing a track 155
– random play sequence 156
– repeating a track 156
– selecting a CD 153
– selecting a track 154
– switching on/off 140
– tone control 141
– volume 141
CD player 153
– controls 140
– fast forward/reverse 157
– playing a track 155
– random play sequence 156
– repeating a track 156
– selecting a track 154
– switching on/off 140
– tone control 141
– volume 141
Center armrest, adjusting
height 108

Mobility

Call
– accepting 166
– displaying accepted 168
– ending 167
– in absence 168
– starting 167
Calling
– from phone book 167
– from Top 8 list 168
– redialing 168
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 109
Capacity of luggage
compartment 210
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 200
Car care, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car data" 76
Care 196
– refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 117
– stowing cargo 117
– vehicle 116
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for light-alloy wheels,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to the
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure

Reference

Brake pads 194
– breaking-in 114
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
– brake fluid 193
– brake force display 90
– brake pads 194
– breaking-in 114
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 86
– handbrake 60
Brake system 114
– brake fluid level 193
– brake pads 114, 194
– brake rotors 116
– breaking-in 114
– warning lamp 13, 193
Brake wear warning
– brake pads 194
– warning lamp 194
Braking
– electronic brake-force
distribution 86
– refer to Braking safely 115
Braking safely 115
Breakdown assistance 176
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 203
Breaking-in 114
Breaking-in the clutch 114
Breaking-in the
differential 114
"Brightness" 83, 94
Brightness of Control
Display 83
Button for starting engine 58
Buttons on steering wheel 11
Bypassing route sections 136

Everything from A to Z

Center console 14
"Central locking" 30
Central locking system 29
– comfort access 36
– from inside vehicle 32
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 6
Changing a wheel 200
Changing language on
Control Display 84
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 83
Changing wheels 188
CHECK button 80
Check Control 79
"Check Control
messages" 80
Check Gas Cap 182
Checking air pressure, refer to
Tire inflation pressure 184
Children's seats, refer to
Child-restraint systems 56
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 57
Child-restraint systems 56
Chrome parts, care, refer to
the Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Cigarette lighter 110
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 110
Cleaning, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
"Climate" 101
Clock 74
– 12h/24h mode 83
– setting time and date 82
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Closing fuel filler cap 182
Clothes hooks, Coupe 109
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 59

Comfort access 36
– observing in car wash 37
– replacing battery 38
Comfort operation
– windows with comfort
access 37
– with comfort access 37
"Communication" 166, 176
"Communication
settings" 174
Compact disc
– refer to CD changer 153
– refer to CD player 153
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 108
Compressed audio files 153
Computer 75
– displays on Control
Display 76
– hour signal 83
"Concert hall", refer to Tone
control 142
Condition Based Service
CBS 195
"Confirmation" 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 110
Consumption display, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 75
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 75
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 132
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 83
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10

Convenience operation
– convertible top 31, 32
– glass sunroof 30, 32
– windows 30, 32
Convertible
– convertible program for
automatic climate
control 101
– opening and closing
windows 38
– rollover protection
system 92
– top 41
– wind deflector 45
Convertible top
– care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– convenience operation 32
– emergency closing 43
– manual closing 43
– opening and closing 42
Coolant 193
– checking level 193
– temperature 74
Cooling, maximum 103
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 86
Country of destination for
navigation 122
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 99
Cruise control 66, 67
– active cruise control 67
Cup holders 109
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 210
"Current position" 136
Current position
– displaying 136
– entering 128
– storing 128
"Customer
Relations" 176, 178
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 210

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up Display 93
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 38
– vehicle battery 200
Distance, refer to
Computer 76
Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 67
"Distance to dest." 76
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 76
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 85
Door entry lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 99
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Door lock 32
"Door locks" 30
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 30
DOT Quality Grades 186
Draft-free ventilation 104
"Driver's door only" 30
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 96
Driving notes 114
Driving route, refer to
Displaying the route 133
Driving stability control
systems 86
Driving through water 115
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 114
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 102
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
– indicator lamp 13, 87
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 87
– activating 87
– indicator lamp 13, 87
DVD for navigation 120

Mobility

Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Data
– capacities 212
– dimensions 211
– engine 210
– technical data 210
– weights 210
"Date" 83
Date 74
– setting 83
"Date format" 83
Daytime driving lamps 96
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
"Deactivated" 50
Deactivating selector lever
interlock 63
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defrosting windows 102
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 102
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 102
"Delete address book" for
navigation 130
"Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 169
"Delete data" for
navigation 130
"Delete" for mobile
phone 169
Destination address
– deleting 129
– entering 121, 124
Destination for navigation
– destination list 127
– entry 121
– home address 130
– selecting from address
book 129
– selecting using
information 126
– storing 128

Destination guidance 132
– bypassing route
sections 136
– canceling voice
instructions 55
– changing specified
route 130
– displaying routes 133
– distance and arrival 132
– interrupting 132
– starting 132
– terminating/continuing 132
– voice instructions 135
– volume of voice
instructions 135
Destination list for
navigation 127
Destinations recently driven
to 127
"Details" in audio mode 155
"Dial" for mobile phone 167
"Dial number" 167
"Diamond button" 54
Digital clock 74
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 148
Dimensions
– Convertible 212
– Coupe 211
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 135
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 135
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 128
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 210
"Display" 83
Display, refer to iDrive 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 99
"Display off" 21
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
"Display settings" 82

Reference

Everything from A to Z

Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
Dynamic Drive 88
Dynamic Driving Control 64
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 87

E
Easy entry, refer to Getting in
back 51
Easy entry/exit 53
EBV, refer to Electronic brakeforce distribution 86
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on CD player 140
Electrical malfunction
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 182
– glass sunroof 41
– luggage compartment lid 34
– storage compartment, hotel
function 33
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 53
Electronic brake-force
distribution 86
Electronic oil level check 191
Emergency assistance, refer
to Roadside Assistance 203
Emergency call 202
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 182
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
– selector lever interlock,
automatic transmission 63

Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
luggage compartment 34
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 203
"Emission inspect." 78
"Enable services" 175
"End call" 167
Engine
– breaking-in 114
– data 210
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
– speed 210
– starting 59
– starting, comfort access 36
– starting difficulties 59
– switching off 59
– switching off when equipped
with Automatic transmission
with comfort access 37
Engine compartment 191
Engine coolant 193
Engine oil
– additives 192
– approved oils 192
– electronic oil level check 191
– recommended oils 192
– temperature 75
– temperature gauge 75
– topping off 192
"Engine oil level" 192
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 210
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Engine speed, refer to Engine
specifications 210
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 59
"Enter address" 122, 128
Entering address 121, 124
Entering destination via town/
city name 122
Entering intersection 123
Entering town/city for
navigation 122

Entering zip code for
navigation 123
"Entertainment" 140
"Entertainment
settings" 141, 148
Entertainment sound output
on/off 141
Entry map for destination 125
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 143
"Equalizer", tone control 143
"ESN" 150
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Event Data Recorders 196
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 114
Exterior mirrors 52
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– automatic heating 53
– folding in and out 52
– tilting down passenger-side
mirror 53
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 204
Eyes for lashing, refer to
Securing cargo 117

F
"Fader", refer to Tone
control 142
Fader, refer to Tone
control 142
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 79
False alarms, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 36
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 51
Fastest route for
navigation 130

At a glance

Handbrake 60
– indicator lamp 13, 60
Handsfree system
– refer to Microphone 14
Hazard warning flashers 15
HD, refer to High Definition
Radio 148
Head airbags 90
Headlamp control,
automatic 96
Headlamp flasher 64
Headlamps
– care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– replacing bulbs 197
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 97
Head restraints
– front 50
– removing 50
– sitting safely 47
"Head-Up Display" 94
Head-Up Display 93

Controls

Garage-door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 106
Gas, refer to Average fuel
consumption 75
Gasoline
– refer to Fuel
specifications 183
– refer to Required fuel 183
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Gear changes
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 62
Gear display
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61

Driving tips

H
Navigation

Communications Entertainment

General driving notes 114
Getting in back 51
Glass sunroof, electric,
comfort operation with
comfort access 37
Glass sunroof, electric with
raise function 40
– convenience operation 32
– moving manually 41
– remote control 30
Glove compartment 107
– rechargeable flashlight 107
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 120
Grills, refer to Ventilation 103
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 210

Mobility

FTM, refer to Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 88
Fuel
– average consumption 75
– display 75
– fuel specifications 183
– high-quality brands 183
– quality 183
– specifications 183
– tank capacity 182
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Fuel filler door 182
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 182
Fuel gauge 75
Fuses 201

Reference

Fast forward
– CD changer 157
– CD player 157
"Fast route" for
navigation 131
"Favorites" calling up with
radio 147
Filling capacities 212
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 203
First-aid kit 203
Flashing when locking and
unlocking, refer to Setting
acknowledgment signals 31
Flashlight, refer to
Rechargeable flashlight 107
Flat tire
– Flat Tire Monitor 88
– run-flat tires 89, 188
Flat Tire Monitor 88
– false alarms 88
– initializing system 88
– limits of system 88
– show chains 189
– warning lamp 89
"FM", reception
range 140, 144
FM, waveband 144
Fog lamps 98
– indicator lamp 13, 98
Folding into raised position
convertible top
compartment floor,
Convertible 35
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 115
Footwell lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 99
For specified oil grades, refer
to Approved engine oils 192
For your own safety 6
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 130
Front airbags 90
Front passenger airbags
deactivating 91
"FTM" 89

Everything from A to Z

Heated
– mirrors, refer to Automatic
functions 53
– rear window 102
– seats 52
– steering wheel 54
Heater 101
Heating
– exterior mirrors 53
– interior 100
– rear window 102
– residual heat 103
– seats 52
– steering wheel 54
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 103
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 117
Height, refer to
Dimensions 211
Height adjustment
– seats 48
– steering wheel 53
High-beam assistant 97
High beams 97
– headlamp flasher 97
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 198
High Definition Radio 148
Highs, refer to Tone
control 141
High water, refer to Driving
through water 115
Hills 115
Holder for cups 109
"Home address" in
navigation 130
Homepage 4
Hood 190
Horn 10
Hotel function 33
– unlocking manually 33
Hot exhaust system 114
"Hour memo" 83
"House number" for destination entry 124

Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
Hydroplaning 115
– also refer to Minimum tread
depth 187

I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 148
Ice, refer to Outside temperature warning 74
ID3-Tag, refer to Information
about track 155
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 83
– assistance window 20
– changing date and time 82
– changing language 84
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 82
– changing unit of measure
units and display form 83
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displaying menus 17
– selecting menu item 19
– selecting or confirming
entry 19
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 58
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 58
– starting engine with comfort
access 37

Indicator/warning lamps
– active steering 90
– airbags 92
– DSC 13, 87
– DTC 13, 87
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
– fog lamps 13, 98
– handbrake 13, 60
– overview 13
– safety belt warning 52
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 54
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 184
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
Information
– on another location 126
– on country 126
– on current position 126
– on destination location 126
"Information" for
navigation 126
"Information on
destination" 128
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 88
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 146
– refer to Power failure 201
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 49
– time and date 82
"Input map" 126
Installation location
– CD changer 157
– navigation drive 120
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 135
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 99
Instrument lighting 99

K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 29
"Keypad" 169
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Kick-down
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 62
Knock control 183

M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 189
Maintenance
– refer to Service
requirements 77
– refer to the Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 195
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 195
Maintenance system 195

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Jacking points 200
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jump starting 203

Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 96
Lamps and bulbs 197
"Languages" 84
"Languages" for
navigation 135
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 117
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 127
"Last seat pos." 49
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 57
Length, refer to
Dimensions 211
License plate lamps, replacing
bulbs 200
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 200
Lighter 110
"Lighting" 65, 96
Lighting
– instruments 99
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 96
– refer to High-beam
assistant 97
Light switch 96
"Limit" 81
Loading, refer to Cargo
loading 116
"Lock after driving" 32
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking
– from inside 33
– from outside 31
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
Locking out, refer to
Unlocking 36
Locking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36

"LOGIC7", refer to Tone
control 142
Low beams 96
– automatic 96
– replacing bulbs 197
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 48
Luggage compartment
– capacity 210
– emergency release 34
– hotel function 33
– increasing capacity,
Convertible 35
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment
lid 34
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31
Luggage compartment lid 34
– emergency operation 34
– emergency release 34
– opening from inside 34
– opening from outside 34
– opening with remote
control 31, 34
– unlocking manually 34
Lumbar support 48
LW, waveband 144

Mobility

Reference

Instrument panel, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 106
Interesting destination for
navigation 126
"Interim time" 82
Interior lamps 99
– switching on with remote
control 31
Interior motion sensor 36
– switching off 36
Interior rearview mirror 53
– automatically dimming, refer
to Automatic functions 53
Interlock on automatic
transmission 62
Intermittent wiper mode 65

Everything from A to Z

Malfunction
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– fuel filler door 182
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 79
Manual air distribution 102
Manual mode with automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 63
"Manual" on the radio 145
Manual operation
– convertible top 43
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 182
– glass sunroof 41
– hotel function 33
– luggage compartment lid 34
– selector lever interlock,
Automatic transmission 63
Manual transmission 60
"Map direction of travel" 134
"Map facing north" 134
Map for navigation
– changing scale 134
– destination entry 125
Map view 133
Map view facing north 133
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 103
Maximum speed with winter
tires 189
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 49
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Microfilter 104
Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for voice command
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 53

Mirrors 52
– automatic curb monitor 53
– heating 53
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 49
"Missed calls" 168
Missed calls 168
Mobile communications
devices in vehicle 115
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 168
– adjusting volume 166
– calling 167
– ending call 167
– missed calls 168
– operation via iDrive 166
– redialing 168
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– Top 8 168
– touch tone dialing 169
Mobile phones
– use in vehicle, refer to Mobile
communications devices in
vehicle 115
Mobile Service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 203
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
"Monitor on / off" 54
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 168
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 153
Multi-function steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 64
– refer to Wiper/washer
system 65
"Mute on / off" 54
MW, waveband 144

N
"Navigation" 76, 121
Navigation destination
– manual entry 121, 124
– selecting via map 125
Navigation drive, installation
location 120
Navigation DVD 120
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice instructions on/off 135
Navigation system 120
– address book 128
– bypassing route
sections 136
– destination entry 121
– destination guidance in
assistance window 120
– destination list 127
– displaying current
position 136
– entering a destination
manually 121, 124
– last destinations 127
– looking for interesting
destination 126
– route display 133
– route list 134
– selecting destination using
information 126
– selecting destination via
map 125
– selecting route criteria 130
– starting 121
– starting destination
guidance 132
– switching off, refer to Terminating/continuing destination guidance 132
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 132
– voice instructions 135
– volume adjustment 135
"Navigation voice
instructions" 54
"Navigation voice instructions
on" 135

P
Panic mode 31
Park Distance Control PDC 85
"Parked car operation" 104
"Parked car ventilation" 104
Parked car ventilation
– activating an activation
time 105
– setting activation time 104
– switching on and off
directly 104
Parking, vehicle 59
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 85
Parking assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 85

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

OBD Socket 196
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 183
Odometer 74
Oil
– additives 192
– approved engine oils 192
– capacity 212
– consumption 191
– consumption, refer to
Engine oil, checking 191
– level 191
– topping off 192
Oil change intervals
– refer to Service
requirements 77
– refer to the Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or to
the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
"On a new destination" for
navigation 127
"onboard info" 76
Onboard monitor, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard tool kit 197
"On destination" 127

Parking brake, refer to
Handbrake 60
Parking lamps/low beams 96
– replacing bulbs 198
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger airbags, deactivating, refer to Exception for
front passenger’s seat 56
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 53
"Pathway lighting" 96
Pathway lighting 96
"PDC" 86
"PDC display on" 86
PDC Park Distance Control 85
Personal Profile 29
"Perspective" 134
"Phone" 167
Phone book 166
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 169
– dialing 167
– most recent numbers 168
– selecting in phone book 168
– Top 8 168
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 203
"Play" in audio mode 154
"Play" on the radio,
selecting 151
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 58
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 104
Position
– displaying 136
– storing 128
Power failure 201
Power windows, refer to
Windows 38
"Presets" on the
radio 144, 150
Presetting parked car ventilation activation times 104
Pressure, tires 184
"Profile" 177

Mobility

"On location" 127
Opening and closing
– comfort access 36
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– using door lock 32
– using the remote control 30
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 170
– adjusting volume 171
– canceling 170
– commands 170
– correcting phone
number 171
– dialing phone number 171
– placing a call 171
– redialing 172
– voice phone book 171
"Options" 177
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 210
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 103
Outside temperature
display 74
– changing unit of measure 83

Reference

Neck support, refer to Front
head restraints 50
"New address" for
navigation 128
"New destination" 121, 125
New remote control 28
"New route" 136
New wheels and tires 188
"Next entertainment
source" 54
Nozzles
– refer to Ventilation 103
– refer to Windshield washer
nozzles 66
Nylon rope, refer to Towstarting and towing 204

Everything from A to Z

Programmable buttons on
steering wheel 54
Protective function, refer to
Anti-trapping mechanism
– glass sunroof 40
– windows 39

R
Radio
– Autostore 145
– controls 140
– High Definition Radio 148
– playing stations 145
– satellite radio 149
– selecting frequency
manually 145
– selecting
waveband 140, 144
– station search 145
– station selection 144
– station with best
reception 145
– storing stations 146
– switching on/off 140
– tone control 141
– volume 141
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 147
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 58
Radio readiness 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
– with comfort access 37
Rain sensor, windshield
washer system 65
"Random", random play
sequence, selecting 156
"Random all" in audio
mode 156
"Random directory" in audio
mode 156
Random play sequence
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156

"RDS" 147
Reading lamps 99
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 199
Rearview mirrors, refer to
Mirrors 52
Rear window
– heating 102
– opening and closing 39
"Received calls" 168
Reception
– quality 147
– radio stations 147
– regional station 145
Reception quality of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Rechargeable flashlight 107
Recirculated-air mode, refer
to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 103
Recirculation of air, refer to
AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 103
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 48
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 81
"Redial" for mobile phone 168
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 199
Refueling 182
Releasing, hood 190
"Relock door if not
opened" 32
Remaining distance, refer to
Remaining range 75
Remaining distance to destination, refer to Computer 76
Remaining range 75
Remote control 28
– battery replacement 38
– comfort access 36
– garage-door opener 106
– luggage compartment lid 31
– malfunction 31, 37
Removing condensation from
windows 102

"Repeat directory" in audio
mode 156
"Repeat" in audio mode 156
"Repeat track" in audio
mode 156
Replacement fuses 201
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 197
Replacing tires
– changing a wheel 200
– new wheels and tires 188
Reporting an accident, refer to
Initiating emergency
call 202
Reporting safety defects 7
Required fuel 183
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 143
"Reset" for stopwatch 81
"Reset" tone settings 143
Residual heat 103
Restraint systems
– for children 56
– refer to Safety belts 51
Retreaded tires 188
Reverse, fast
– CD changer 157
– CD player 157
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 61
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
Road map 133
"Roadside
Assistance" 176, 178
Roadside Assistance 203
Roadside parking lamps 97
– replacing bulbs, refer to
Parking lamps 198
Rollover protection system on
Convertible 92
– lowering 93
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 204

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Safety belts 51
– damage 52
– indicator lamp 52
– sitting safely 47
Safety belt tensioners, refer to
Safety belts 51
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
– airbags 90
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 92
– safety belts 51
Satellite radio 149
– enabling channels 150
– selecting channel 150
– storing channel 150
"SAT" on the radio 140, 150

Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
Selector lever interlock, refer
to Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
Sequential Manual Gearbox
SMG 61
"Service" 77, 175, 191
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 203
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US
models 195
Service interval display, refer
to Service requirements 77
"Service notification" 175
"Service Request" 176, 178
"Service
requirements" 78, 175, 192
Service requirements 77
– also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 195
"Service Status" 175
"Set date" 83
"Set" in audio mode 140
"Set" in trip computer 77
"Set service date" 78
"Set time" 82
Settings
– changing on Control
Display 82
– clock, 12h/24h mode 83
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 29
Setting speed limit 81
Setting time, refer to Preselecting activation time 104
"Set tire pressure" 89

Mobility

"Save current
destination" 130
"Scan"
– playing a music track 155
– playing stations 145
Scan
– CD changer 155
– CD player 155
– radio 145
"Scan all" in audio mode 155
"Scan directory" in audio
mode 155
Screw thread for tow
fitting 205
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 149
Seats 48
– adjusting 48
– heating 52
– lumbar support 48
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 49
– sitting safely 47
– sports seat 48
– storing the setting 49
– thigh support 48
Securing cargo 117
– ski bag 111
Securing load, refer to
Securing cargo 117
– ski bag 111
"Select as destination" 127
"Select current speed" 81
Selecting audio sources, refer
to Operating via iDrive 140
Selecting distance for active
cruise control 69
Selecting frequency
manually 145
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for
navigation system
display 134
Selecting route 130
Selection options with
navigation system 130

Reference

Rotary fuel controller, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 130
– bypassing sections 136
– changing 130, 136
– display 133
– displaying arrow display 133
– displaying map 133
– displaying towns/cities and
streets 134
– list 134
– selecting 130
– selecting criteria 130
Route map, refer to Map
view 133
"Route preference",
changing 130
Route selection 130
Run-flat tires 188
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 89
– flat tire 89
– tire inflation pressure 184
– tire replacement 188
– winter tires 188

Everything from A to Z

Shifting
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 62
Shifting paddles 62
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
Short commands of voice
command system 213
"Short route" for
navigation 131
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 130
"Show current position" 126
"Show destination
position" 126
Side airbags 90
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 199
Side turn signals, replacing
bulbs 199
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sill panel lighting, refer to
Interior lamps 99
Sitting safely 47
– with airbags 47
– with head restraints 47
– with safety belts 47
Ski bag 110
Sliding/tilt roof, refer to Glass
sunroof, electric with raise
function 40
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 115
SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
– acceleration assistant 64
– breaking-in 114
– Dynamic Driving Control 64
– gear display 61
– kick-down 62
– shiftlock 61
– towing 205
– tow-starting 206

Snow chains 189
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 110
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 196
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 58
Song search with CD, refer to
Playing a track 155
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency call 202
Spare fuses 201
Spare key 28
– adapter 28
Spare remote control 28
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 192
Speed-dependent
volume 142
Speed limit 81
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 81
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", tone
control 142
Speed with winter tires 189
Sport program
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63
– refer to Dynamic Driving
Control 64
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
"Star button" 54
Start/Stop button 58
"Start" for stopwatch 81
"Start guidance" 124, 132
Starting assistant 115
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 203
– refer to Special starting
conditions 59
Starting engine 59
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 115
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start route guidance" 126

"Start service" 176
"State / Province" for destination entry 122
"State inspection" 78
Station, refer to Radio 144
"Status" 78
Status information on Control
Display 20
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel
– adjustment 53
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Easy entry/exit 53
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 54
– lock 58
– locking 58
– memory 49
– programmable buttons 54
"Steering wheel buttons" 54
Steering-wheel shift buttons,
refer to Shift paddles 62
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 90
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 62
"Stop" for stopwatch 81
"Stopwatch" 81
Stopwatch 81
Storage compartments 108
"Store in address book" for
navigation 128
"Store" on the radio 146, 151
Storing current position 128
Storing radio stations 146
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 49
Storing tires 189
Straps, refer to Loading 117
"Street" for destination
entry 123
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 184
SW, waveband 144

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Tachometer 74
Tail lamps 199
– replacing bulbs 199
Tank capacity
– also refer to Filling
capacities 212
– fuel tank capacity 182
Target cursor for
navigation 126
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 6
Technical data 210
Telematic, refer to
TeleService, BMW
Assist 174
Telephone
– refer to Mobile phone 162
– refer to separate Owner’s
Manual
"Telephone list" 54
TeleService 174
– enabling 174
– services offered 175

Tires
– age 186
– air loss 89
– breaking-in 114
– condition 187
– damage 187
– inflation pressure 184
– minimum tread depth 187
– Monitoring inflation
pressure, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 88
– new wheels and tires 188
– replacing 188
– retreaded tires 188
– run-flat tires 188
– size 185
– size, refer to The right
wheels and tires 188
– wear indicators 187
– wheel/tire combination 188
– winter tires 189
Tires with run-flat properties,
refer to Run-flat tires
– continuing to drive with a
damaged tire 89
– flat tire 89
– new wheels and tires 188
"Tone" 141
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 141
– middle setting 143
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 197
top 41
"Top 8" for mobile phone 168
Torque, refer to Engine
specifications 210
Touch tone dialing 169
Tow fitting 204
Towing 204
– tow fitting 204
"Town / City" for destination
entry 122
Tow-starting 204, 206
Tracks
– finding 155
– random play sequence 156
– sample, Scan 155

Mobility

Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 102
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 101
– of coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
Temperature display
– changing units of
measure 83
– outside temperature 74
– temperature warning 74
Temperature gauge, engine
oil 75
Temperature warning 74
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66
"Terminate services" 177
"Text language" 84
"Theater", refer to Tone
control 142
The individual vehicle 5
Tie-down points, refer to
Securing cargo 117
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 53
"Time" 82
"Time format" 83
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation time 104
"Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation 105
"Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation 105
Tire Quality Grading 186

Reference

Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching between high
beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to Highbeam assistant 97
Switching off engine 59
Switching off the tilt alarm
sensor 36
Switching on
– audio 140
– CD changer 140
– CD player 140
– radio 140
Switching the cooling function
on and off 102
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 97
Symbols 4
– indicator and warning
lamps 13

Everything from A to Z

Track width, refer to
Dimensions 211
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traffic congestion, refer to
Bypassing route
sections 136
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– deactivating selector lever
interlock on automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 63
– manual transmission 60
– SMG Sequential Manual
Gearbox 61
– starting assistant 115
Transporting children
safely 56
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 117
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 187
Treble, refer to Tone
control 141
"Treble", tone control 142
"Trip computer" 77
Trip computer 76
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 74
"Triple turn signal
activation" 65
Trip odometer 74
Trunk, refer to Luggage
compartment 35
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 34
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 211
Turn signals 64
– replacing bulbs 198

Undercarriage protection,
refer to the Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 186
"Units" 83
Units
– average fuel
consumption 83
– temperature 83
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 106
Universal remote control, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 106
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 36
Unlocking and locking doors,
setting confirmation
signals 31
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 36
"Update services" 177
"Use current location as
address" 129, 130
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 200
– refer to Replacing battery 38

Vehicle
– battery 200
– breaking-in 114
– care, refer to the Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– cargo loading 116
– dimensions 211
– parking 59
– washing, refer to the Caring
for your vehicle brochure
– weights 210
Vehicle jack 200
– jacking points 200
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 136
"Vehicle settings" when
unlocking 30
Ventilation 103
– draft-free 104
– for cooling 104
– parked car ventilation 104
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 100
"Vent settings" 102
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 135
Voice command system 22
– short commands 213
Voice instructions for
navigation system 135
– muting 55
– repeating 55, 135
– switching on/off 55, 135
– volume 135
Voice phone book 171
Volume 140
– audio sources 140
– mobile phone 166
– setting speeddependent 142
– voice instructions 135
Volume adjustment in audio
mode, front-to-rear 142

At a glance
Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

X
Xenon lamps 197
– replacing bulbs 197

Mobility

Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator/warning lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 79
Warning triangle 202
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 195
Washer fluid
– capacity of the reservoir 66
– wiper system 66
Washer fluid reservoir 66
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 115
Waveband for radio 144
"WB" 140, 148
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 187
Weather news flashes 147
Website 4
Weights 210
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 188
Wheel/tire damage 187
Wheel/tire replacement, refer
to New wheels and tires 188
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 211
Wheels and tires 184
Width, refer to
Dimensions 211
Wind deflector 45
Windows 38
– comfort operation with
comfort access 37
– convenience
operation 30, 32
– opening and closing,
Convertible 38
– opening and closing,
Coupe 38
– rear window, Convertible 39

Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 66
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 102
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 93
Windshield washer nozzles 66
Windshield washer system,
refer to Washer/wiper
system 65
Windshield wiper blade
replacement 197
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper/washer system 65
Winter tires 189
– setting speed limit 81
– storage 189
Wiper blade replacement 197
Wiper system 65
– rain sensor 65
– washer fluid 66
– windshield washer
nozzles 66
"With highways" for
navigation 131
Word matching principle for
navigation 131
Working in the engine
compartment 190
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard tool kit 197

Reference

Refueling
To ensure that you always have all the essential
data on hand when refueling, we recommend
that you fill in the following tables with the specifications and information that apply to your
vehicle. Consult the index for individual specifications.

Fuel
Designation

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Engine oil
Quality

Tire inflation pressures
Summer tires
Front

Rear

Winter tires
Front

Up to 2 persons
4 persons or 4 persons plus luggage

Rear

More about BMW

The Ultimate
Driving Machine

01 41 0 159 709 ue

bmwusa.com

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Print high-res
Page Count                      : 236
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:f493c006-653a-44a9-83bb-c1d702fa3a8c
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Modify Date                     : 2005:08:09 17:35:33+02:00
Create Date                     : 2005:08:09 16:41:01Z
Metadata Date                   : 2005:08:09 17:35:33+02:00
Document ID                     : uuid:3a88447a-f758-4731-841b-84913f444046
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Creator                         : FrameMaker 7.0

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Bmw 2006 650I Convertible Owners Manual

Bmw-2006-650I-Coupe-Owners-Manual-694378 bmw-2006-650i-coupe-owners-manual-694378

2006 650i Convertible Owner's Manual 2006 650i Convertible Owner's Manual

2006 650i Coupe Owner's Manual 2006 650i Coupe Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation